2009 civic hybrid

2009 Civic HybridOwner’s Manual

(Unlinked)

This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web use. This is due to changes

in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a

hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.

© 2008 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. P/N 00X31-SNC-6300

This owner’s manual should be considered apermanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This owner’s manual covers all models of theCivic Hybrid. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice and withoutincurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33SNCC30

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

０８／０７／１９　０９：２５：３４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０００１　

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manualhelps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staffis specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle.Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answerany questions and concerns.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2009 Honda Civic Hybrid was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

i

０８／０７／１９　０９：２５：４０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０００２　

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone elseexcept as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The datacan be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It mayalso be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

Introduction

WARNING:

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. Thesedevices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failureof any airbag system component.

ii

０８／０７／１９　０９：２５：４３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０００３　

－

－

－

－

－

－

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

on the vehicle.

how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

Safety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety Section

Safety Labels

Instructions

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

０８／０７／１９　０９：２５：５３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０００４　

０８／０７／１９　０９：２５：５６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０００５　

(seat belts, SRS, and child protection)

(fluid capacities and tire pressures)

(main controls)

(indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column)

(climate control, audio, steering wheel, security, and cruise control )

(fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)

(engine and transmission operation)

(minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)

(flat tire, dead battery, overheating, and fuses)

(vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)

(warranty and contact information)

(how to order)

Contents

............................................................Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

................................................................................................................................................Index . I

..................................................Service Information Summary . last page

...............................................................................................Your Vehicle at a Glance . 3

..........................................Instruments and Controls . 55

.............................................Features . 103

.......................................................................Before Driving . 253

.........................................................................................Driving . 269

.................................................Maintenance . 287

.........................................Taking Care of the Unexpected . 323

..............................................Technical Information . 347

..................Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) . 363

..................................................................................Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) . 367

IND

EX

1

０８／０７／１９　０９：２６：０５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０００６　

A summary of the information youneed when you pull up to the fuelpump.

How to order manuals and othertechnical literature.

A convenient reference to thesections in this manual.

Explains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator and gauge,and how to use the controls on thedashboard and steering column.

A quick reference to the maincontrols in your vehicle.

What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to loadluggage and other cargo.

The proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park.

A summary of the warrantiescovering your new vehicle, and howto contact us for any reason. Refer toyour warranty manual for detailedinformation.

The maintenance minder shows youwhen you need to take your vehicleto the dealer for maintenance service.There is also a list of things to checkand instructions on how to checkthem.

ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,and technical information.

This section covers several problemsmotorists sometimes experience,and details how to handle them.

Important information about theproper use and care of your vehicle’sseat belts, an overview of thesupplemental restraint system, andvaluable information on how toprotect children with child restraints.

How to operate the climate controlsystem, the audio system, and otherconvenience features.

Overview of Contents

Contents

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Driver and Passenger Safety

Instruments and Controls

Features

Before Driving

Driving

Maintenance

Warranty and CustomerRelations(U.S. and Canada only)

Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

Index

Service Information Summary

Technical Information

Taking Care of the Unexpected

2

０８／０７／１９　０９：２６：２２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０００７　

＊

＊ If equipped:


Your

Vehicle

ataG

lance

3

AUDIO SYSTEM(P. 9, 24)PASSENGER’S FRONT AIRBAG

DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAG(P. 9, 24)

MIRROR CONTROLS

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

TRUNK RELEASEHANDLE

Vehicle with navigation system is shown

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK(P. 167)

USB ADAPTER CABLE

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION (CVT)

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET

DOOR LOCK TAB

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORSGAUGES (P. 64)

(P. 58)

(P. 98)

(P. 81)

(P. 97)

(P. 255)

(P. 88)

(P. 110)

(P. 104)

(P. 81)

(P. 101)

(P. 272)SEAT HEATER SWITCHES(P. 96)

(P. 142, 185)

０８／０７／１９　０９：２６：２９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０００８　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊＊＊ Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.

Canadian model only

1 :2 :3 :4 :

If equipped


4

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS BUTTONS

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR(P. 31)

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER


DISPLAY CHANGEBUTTON(P. 65)

SEL/RESETBUTTON

HORN

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

(P. 75)

(P. 65)

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST(VSA ) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH(P. 286)

(P. 210)

(P. 219)

(P. 256)

(P. 219)(P. 77)

(P. 74) (P. 73)

(P. 76)

(P. 76)HEATED MIRRORS(P. 98)

(P. 214)HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICECONTROL BUTTONS

BLUETOOTHHANDSFREELINKSYSTEM VOICE CONTROLBUTTONS

1

2

3

4

4

０８／０７／２２　０９：２６：５６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０００９　

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8...........................................Airbags . 9

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 11............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 12

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 135. Fasten and Position the

.............................Seat Belts . 146. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 15.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16...Additional Safety Precautions . 17

Additional Information About.......................Your Seat Belts . 18

..Seat Belt System Components . 18......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 19

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 19

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 20Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 21......Airbag System Components . 21

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 24

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 29..How the SRS Indicator Works . 30

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 30

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 31

.............................Airbag Service . 32...Additional Safety Precautions . 32

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 34

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 34

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 35

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 35

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 37

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 37

...Additional Safety Precautions . 38Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 39.......................Protecting Infants . 39

.........Protecting Small Children . 40.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 41....................Installing a Child Seat . 42

...............................With LATCH . 43.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 45

..............................With a Tether . 46...........Protecting Larger Children . 48

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 48..................Using a Booster Seat . 49

When Can a Larger Child Sit in.........................................Front . 50

...Additional Safety Precautions . 51.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 52

...................................Safety Labels . 53

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

5

０８／０７／１９　０９：２６：４２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００１０　

－

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse with

every additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.While airbags can save lives, they

can cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat(see pages ).

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

14

34 51

289

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Don’t Drink and Drive

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Restrain All Children

6

０８／０７／１９　０９：２６：５１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００１１　

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment, front and rear crushzones, a collapsible steering column,and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

7

(9)

(2)

(6)

(4)(3) (1)(8)

(7)

(5)

(2)(11)

(9)

(10)(8)(12)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zone(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(11) Door Locks(12) Front Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners

０８／０７／１９　０９：２６：５８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００１２　

－－－－

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including:

frontal impactsside impactsrear impactsrollovers


Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What You Should Do:

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

０８／０７／１９　０９：２７：０９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００１３　

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

In addition, your vehicle has sidecurtain airbags to help protect theheads of the driver, front passenger,and passengers in the outer rearseating positions during a moderateto severe side impact (see page

for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

24

28

29


Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

9

０８／０７／１９　０９：２７：１６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００１４　

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

To dotheir job, airbags must inflate withtremendous force. So whileairbags help save lives, they cancause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.


Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

Airbags can pose hazards.

What you should do:

10

０８／０７／１９　０９：２７：２２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００１５　

－See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors are closedand locked.

Your vehicle has a door-openindicator on the instrument panel toindicate when any door is not tightlyclosed.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengersand teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front seat.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

See page for how to lock thedoors, page for how the door-openindicator works, and page for howthe automatic door locking andunlocking feature works.

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

34 51

6081

82

CONTINUED

Adjust the Front SeatsIntroduction

Close and Lock the Doors1.

2.

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11

０８／０７／１９　０９：２７：３３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００１６　

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel up and down, and inand out (see page ).

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

Once a seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.

7791


Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

12

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

０８／０７／１９　０９：２７：４１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００１７　

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe center of the back of your headrests against the center of therestraint.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

Have passengers adjust their headrestraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints and how the driver’sand front passenger’s active headrestraints work.

92

92

Adjust the Head Restraints4.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

13

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness, and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

０８／０７／２１　２０：２０：３７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００１８　

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.


Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

14

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

０８／０７／１９　０９：２７：５５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００１９　

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and head restraints, andput on their seat belts, it is veryimportant that they continue to situpright, well back in their seats, withtheir feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, press and hold the releasebutton and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

18

CONTINUED

Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

RELEASE BUTTON

０８／０７／１９　０９：２８：０４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００２０　

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

Advice for Pregnant Women


16

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

０８／０７／１９　０９：２８：１０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００２１　

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Additional Safety Precautions


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

17

０８／０７／１９　０９：２８：１７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００２２　

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all seating positions.The front seat belts are alsoequipped with automatic seat belttensioners.

If the indicator comes on or thebeeper sounds when the driver’s seatbelt is latched and there is no frontseat passenger and no items on thefront seat, something may beinterfering with the monitoringsystem. Look for and remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

Any object on the floor that istouching the rear of the seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer.

This system uses the same sensorsas the front airbags to monitorwhether the front seat belts arelatched or unlatched, and how muchweight is on the front passenger’sseat (see pages and ).

This system monitors the front seatbelts. If you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position before yourseat belt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. If

your seat belt is not fastened beforethe beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

The seat belt system includes anindicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

2726

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components

Seat Belt Indicator

18

０８／０７／１９　０９：２８：２７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００２３　

CONTINUED

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in position.

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to help

restrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat (see page ).

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten theseat belt, pull it out only as far asneeded.

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags todeploy.

14

45


Automatic Seat Belt TensionersLap/Shoulder Belt

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

19

０８／０７／２１　２０：２０：４７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００２４　

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by your dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

Honda provides a limited warrantyon seat belts. See your

booklet fordetails.

If a side curtain airbag deploysduring a side impact, the tensioneron that side of the vehicle will alsoactivate.

311

do not deploy

HondaWarranty Information


Seat Belt Maintenance

20

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

０８／０７／２１　２０：２０：５５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００２５　

CONTINUED

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

21

(9)(8) (1) (2)

(3) (11)

(5)

(4)

(13)(7)

(10)

(14)(5)

(4)

(6)

(10)

(12)

(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit(13) Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners(14) Rear Safing Sensor

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors

０８／０７／１９　０９：２８：５１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００２６　

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceiling,above the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

Your Airbag System includes:

24

28

29


22

(16)

(15)

(15)

(15) Side Impact Sensor (Second)(16) Side Curtain Airbags

０８／０７／１９　０９：２８：５６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００２７　

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver’s seat belt and thefront passenger’s seat belt arelatched or unlatched (see page

).

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. If the weight is about 65lbs (29 kg) or less (the weightof an infant or small child), thepassenger’s front airbag will beturned off (see page ).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

Sensors that can detect whethera child is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and signal thecontrol unit to turn the airbagoff (see page ).

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

19

30

30

31

26

31

18

26


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

23

０８／０７／１９　０９：２９：０５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００２８　

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed.

Only the driver’s airbag will deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).31

How Your Front Airbags Work


24

０８／０７／１９　０９：２９：１３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００２９　

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whethersensors detect the occupant iswearing a seat belt or not.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

If the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

CONTINUED


Dual-Threshold Airbags

not latched

latched

Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

０８／０７／１９　０９：２９：２１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００３０　

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Back-seat passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Hondadoes not encourage carrying aninfant or small child in front, if thesensors detect the weight of aninfant or small child (up to about 65lbs or 29 kg), the system willautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any objects or metal itemsunder the front seats.

Be aware that objects placed on thepassenger’s seat can also cause theairbag to be turned off.

Advanced Airbags


26

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSORS

０８／０７／１９　０９：２９：３１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００３１　

When the airbag is turned off, a‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator inthe center of the dashboard comeson (see page ).

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag will be off. However, thepassenger airbag off indicator willnot come on.

Also, make sure the floor mat behindthe front passenger’s seat is hookedto the floor mat anchor (see page

). If it is not, the mat mayinterfere with the proper operationof the sensors and operation of theseat.

31 311


do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

27

０８／０７／１９　０９：２９：３７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００３２　

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if theposition sensors detect a child hasleaned into the side airbag’sdeployment path, the airbag will shutoff.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid acceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

How Your Side Airbags Work


Side Airbag Cutoff System

28

０８／０７／２１　２０：２１：０２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００３３　

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

30


How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

０８／０７／１９　０９：２９：５２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００３４　

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on for several seconds thengoes off. This tells you the system isworking properly.

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

The SRS indicator alerts you to apotential problem with your airbagsor seat belt tensioners.

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It doesmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on for several secondsand then go off (see page ). If itdoesn’t come on, stays on, or comeson while driving without a passengerin the front seat, have the systemchecked.

59


How the SRS IndicatorWorks

How the SideAirbag OffIndicator Works

not

30

U.S. Canada

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

０８／０７／１９　０９：３０：０２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００３５　

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less(the weight of an infant or smallchild) on the front passenger’s seat.It does there is a problemwith the airbag.

Be aware that objects placed on thefront seat can cause the indicator tocome on.

If no weight is detected on the frontseat, the airbag will be automaticallyshut off. However, the indicator willnot come on.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay come on and off repeatedly ifthe total weight on the seat is nearthe airbag cutoff threshold.

If an adult or teenage passenger isriding in front, move the seat as farto the rear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

If the indicator comes on with nofront seat passenger and no objectson the seat, or with an adult ridingthere, something may be interferingwith the weight sensors. Look forand remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object on the floor that istouching the rear of the seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer assoon as possible.

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.


How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not mean

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

Canada

U.S.

０８／０７／１９　０９：３０：１１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００３６　

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the frontpassenger’s weight sensors, thefront seat belt tensioners, and allseat belts and their anchors wornduring a crash to make sure theyare operating properly.

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

Airbag Service Additional Safety Precautions

An airbag ever inflates.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

Do not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.


32

０８／０７／１９　０９：３０：１８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００３７　

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact HondaAutomobile Customer Service at(800) 999-1009.

If water oranother liquid soaks into a seat-back, it can prevent the side airbagcutoff system from workingproperly.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

Do not expose the front passenger’sseat-back to liquid.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

０８／０７／１９　０９：３０：２２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００３８　

－－

－

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children age 12 andunder.

39 475148

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Protecting Children General Guidelines

34

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

０８／０７／１９　０９：３０：３０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００３９　

－

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat.

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sfront airbag off (see page ),please follow these guidelines:

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt. (See page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren.)

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenaged 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat. Somestates have laws restricting wherechildren may ride.

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

31

48

CONTINUED

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks


Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Small Children

Larger Children

Infants

Children who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

０８／０７／１９　０９：３０：４０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００４０　

－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

Canadian Models

U.S. Models


36

SUN VISORS DASHBOARD

SUN VISORS

０８／０７／１９　０９：３０：５３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００４１　

－

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visual contact,we strongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

15

14

48

91

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

If a Child Requires CloseAttention


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

37

０８／０７／１９　０９：３１：００　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００４２　

－


If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.

This can preventchildren from accidentally fallingout (see page ).

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the trunk, whichcan lead to accidental injury ordeath.

Childrenwho play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles. Know how tooperate the emergency trunkopener and decide if your childrenshould be shown how to use thisfeature (see page ).

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

If a child wraps a looseseat belt around their neck, theycan be seriously or fatally injured.(See pages and for how toactivate and deactivate thelockable retractor.)

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.

45 46

82

81

Additional Safety Precautions

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Use the childproof door locks toprevent children from opening therear doors.

Keep vehicle keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Lock all doors and the trunk whenyour vehicle is not in use.

Make sure any unused seat beltthat a child can reach is buckled,the lockable retractor is activated,and the belt is fully retracted andlocked.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.


38

０８／０７／１９　０９：３１：０８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００４３　

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

It could also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

０８／０７／１９　０９：３１：１８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００４４　

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat. We strongly recommend placing a

forward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the seat.

Even with advanced front airbagsthat automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

31

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

40

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

０８／０７／１９　０９：３１：２６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００４５　

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe lower anchors and tethers forchildren (LATCH) system.

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two outerseating positions in the back seat.

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

CONTINUED

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

1.

2.

3.

Selecting a Child Seat

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

41

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

０８／０７／１９　０９：３１：３５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００４６　

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side

movement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (lower anchors andtethers for children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat: If the child seat is not secure, try

installing it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for a rear-facing child seat.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Secure the child in the child seat.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat

42

０８／０７／１９　０９：３１：４３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００４７　

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (lower anchors and tethersfor children) at the outer rear seats.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.Make sure there are no objects

near the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

Small marks are positioned toindicate the locations of each anchorpoint.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

43

BUTTON

LOWER ANCHORS Rigid type

０８／０７／１９　０９：３１：５３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００４８　

Other LATCH-compatible seats havea flexible-type connector as shownabove.

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint and over the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

If the tether strap is too long andcannot be tightened firmly, find aroute where the strap can betightened securely.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

6.

5.

4.

7.

8.

92


44

Front

ANCHOR

TETHER STRAP HOOKFlexible type

０８／０７／１９　０９：３２：０１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００４９　

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

1. 2.

3.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

０８／０７／１９　０９：３２：０８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００５０　

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child seat, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat, using one of theanchorage points shown above.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

4. 5.

Installing a Child Seat with aTether


46

COVER

ANCHORAGE POINTS

ANCHOR

０８／０７／１９　０９：３２：１６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００５１　

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap over the seat-back andthrough the head restraint legs.

If the tether strap is too long andcannot be tightened firmly, find aroute where the strap can betightened securely.

Lift the anchor cover, then attachthe tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

1. 2.

3.

45


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

47

Front

ANCHORANCHOR

FrontOuter Position Center Position

TETHER STRAP HOOK TETHER STRAP HOOK

０８／０７／１９　０９：３２：２３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００５２　

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

1.

2.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger Children

48

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

０８／０７／１９　０９：３２：３０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００５３　

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Some states and Canadian provincesalso require children to use a boosterseat until they reach a given age orweight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Besure to check current laws in thestates or provinces where you intend

to drive.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible, and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

3.

4.

5.41

Using a Booster Seat


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

49

０８／０７／１９　０９：３２：３９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００５４　

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

14 48

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

Physical Size

Maturity


50

０８／０７／１９　０９：３２：５０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００５５　

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.


Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

51

０８／０７／１９　０９：３２：５５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００５６　

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand cooling system as follows:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Set the fan speed to high.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

With the trunk open, airflow can pullexhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk open, open all the windows andset the climate control system asshown below.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

52

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

０８／０７／１９　０９：３３：０３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００５７　

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury or death. Read these labelscarefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label, which is removedby the owner), contact your dealerfor a replacement.

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

Safety Labels

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

53

DASHBOARD

RADIATOR CAP

SUN VISORS

０８／０７／１９　０９：３３：１７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００５８　

U.S. modelsU.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models

Canadian models

Canadian models

Safety Labels

54

HOOD DOORJAMBSHOOD

０８／０７／１９　０９：３３：４０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００５９　

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 56............................Instrument Panel . 57

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 58.............................................Gauges . 65

.....................................Odometer . 65..............Display Change Button . 66

.................Current Fuel Mileage . 66...................Temperature Gauge . 66

...................................Trip Meter . 67................Average Fuel Mileage . 67

..................................Fuel Gauge . 67Outside Temperature

...................................Indicator . 68..........Check Fuel Cap Message . 69

..................Maintenance Minder . 69.........IMA Battery Level Gauge . 70

................Charge/Assist Gauge . 71Controls Near the Steering

...........................................Wheel . 72.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 73

.........Turn Signals and Headlights . 74............Daytime Running Lights . 75

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 75.................Hazard Warning Button . 76.................Rear Window Defogger . 76

..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 77

...............................Keys and Locks . 78........................Immobilizer System . 79

................................Ignition Switch . 80......................................Door Locks . 81

......................Power Door Locks . 81..............Childproof Door Locks . 82

.Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 82.....................Auto Door Locking . 82

.................Auto Door Unlocking . 85................................................Trunk . 88

........Emergency Trunk Opener . 88.......................Remote Transmitter . 89

.................................................Seats . 91....................................Seat Heaters . 96

..............................Power Windows . 97.............................................Mirrors . 98

.................................Parking Brake . 99.........Interior Convenience Items . 100

.......................Beverage Holder . 101.........Accessory Power Socket . 101

..................................Glove Box . 101.............Console Compartment . 101

...............................Interior Lights . 102

Instruments and Controls

Instruments

andC

ontrols

55

０８／０７／１９　０９：３３：４５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００６０　

＊

＊ If equipped:

Control Locations

56

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

MIRROR CONTROLS

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORSGAUGES

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

(P. 58)(P. 64)

TRUNK RELEASEHANDLE

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK(P. 167)


HORN

AUDIO SYSTEM

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION (CVT)

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

DOOR LOCK TAB

USB ADAPTER CABLE

(P. 98)

(P. 81)

(P. 97)

(P. 255)

(P. 88)

(P. 101) (P. 142, 185)

(P. 96)SEAT HEATER SWITCHES (P. 272)

(P. 101)

(P. 81)

(P. 104)

(P. 110)

０８／０７／１９　０９：３３：５２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００６１　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.Optional in U.S.1 :

2 : If equipped

Instrument Panel

Instruments

andC

ontrols

57

TRUNK-OPENINDICATOR

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTSINDICATOR

LIGHTS ONINDICATOR

(P. 60)(P. 60)

HIGH BEAMINDICATOR(P. 60)

(P. 60)

CRUISE MAININDICATOR (P. 61)

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR (P. 61)

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

IMA SYSTEM INDICATOR(P. 62)

AUTO IDLE STOP INDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P. 61)(P. 62)

(P. 63)

(P. 63)

(P. 59)ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM(ABS) INDICATOR

(P. 60)

(P. 62, 196, 197)

MALFUNCTION INDICATORLAMP

(P. 30, 59)SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

LOW TIRE PRESSUREINDICATOR

BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR(AMBER)

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING(EPS) INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR (RED)

DOOR-OPEN INDICATOR(P. 60)

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

MAINTENANCE MINDERINDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) INDICATOR

(P. 59)

(P. 30, 58)

(P. 61)

(P. 18, 58)

(P. 61)

(P. 62, 335)

(P. 62, 336)

(P. 62, 337)

(P. 58, 338)

(P. 64)

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEMINDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST(VSA) ACTIVATIONINDICATOR

(P. 64) 1

1

2

2

０８／０７／１９　０９：３４：０２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００６２　

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

If it stays on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .This indicator reminds you and your

passengers to fasten your seat belts.

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tires.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belt, the beeper soundsand the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belt before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

This indicator comes on for severalseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This indicator willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff system,side curtain airbags, automatic seatbelt tensioners, driver’s seat positionsensor, or the front passenger’sweight sensors. For moreinformation, see page .

1.

2.

18

30

338

Instrument Panel Indicators

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Parking Brakeand BrakeSystemIndicator (Red)

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

58

U.S. Canada

０８／０７／１９　０９：３４：１１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００６３　

This indicator comes on for severalseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For more information, see page .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem with theABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis indicator on, your vehicle stillhas normal braking ability but noanti-lock function. For moreinformation, see page .

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see pages and ).Replace the bulb as soon as possible,since other drivers cannot see thatyou are signaling.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsand all turn signals on the outside ofthe vehicle flash.

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly codedignition key. If it is not a properlycoded key, the indicator will blink,and the engine’s fuel system will bedisabled (see page ).30

280

79307 308


Side Airbag OffIndicator

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Instruments

andC

ontrols

59

U.S. Canada

０８／０７／１９　０９：３４：２０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００６４　

If this indicator comes on when theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position and the parking brake isreleased, it means there is a problemwith a circuit. Have your vehiclechecked by your dealer.

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator also comes on withreduced brightness when thedaytime running lights (DRL) are on(see page ).

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will remain on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door and remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

This indicator comes on if the trunklid is not closed tightly.

This indicator comes on if any dooris not closed tightly.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on while driving,it indicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are significantly lowon pressure.

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost the pressure, and determinethe cause. If it is because of a flat tire,replace the flat tire with the compactspare (see page ), and have theflat tire repaired as soon as possible.If two or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service(see page ). For moreinformation, see page .

74

75

325

345324

U.S. models only


‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Lights On Indicator

Trunk-open Indicator

Door-open Indicator

Low Tire PressureIndicator

60

０８／０７／１９　０９：３４：３０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００６５　

This indicator comes on as areminder that you must refuel soon.

This indicator goes off when yourdealer resets it after completing therequired maintenance service.

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your vehicle in forscheduled maintenance. Themaintenance main items and subitems will be displayed in theinformation display. See page formore information on themaintenance minder.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button (seepage ).

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicatorcome on (see page ).

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If this indicator comes on and stayson at any other time, or if it does notcome on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, thereis a problem with the TPMS. Withthis indicator on, the low tirepressure indicator will not come onwhen a tire loses pressure. Take thevehicle to your dealer to have thesystem checked.

When the indicator comes on, thereare about 1.9 US gal (7.5 ) of fuelremaining in the tank.When the reading reaches E, there isa very small amount of fuel in thetank.

216

216

302289

Canadian models only

U.S. models only


Low Fuel Indicator

Maintenance MinderIndicator

Cruise Main Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

61

０８／０７／１９　０９：３４：４３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００６６　

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

See page . This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, it indicates a problem in theintegrated motor assist (IMA)system. With the IMA indicator on,the vehicle may not accelerate as itnormally does. Have the vehiclechecked by the dealer as soon aspossible.

See pages and .

This indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. For moreinformation, see page .213

337

335

336 277276


Security System Indicator Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

IMA System Indicator

Auto Idle Stop Indicator

62

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

０８／０７／１９　０９：３４：５４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００６７　

If you turn the steering wheel to thefull left or right position repeatedlywhile stopping or driving at very lowspeed, you may feel slightly hardersteering due to overheating of thesteering gearbox.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. When the brake systemindicator (amber) is on, there is theproblem with the CooperativeControl with regenerative brake,Creep Aid System or Brake Assist(the normal brake operates properly).Have your vehicle checked by yourdealer.For more information, see page .

Continuously driving under thoseconditions could damage the powersteering system.

This indicator normally comes onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position and goes offafter the engine starts. If it comes onat any other time, there is a problemin the electric power steering system.If this happens, stop the vehicle in asafe place, and turn off the engine.Reset the system by restarting theengine. The indicator will not turnoff immediately. If it does not go offafter driving a short distance, orcomes back on again while driving,take the vehicle to your dealer tohave it checked. With the indicatoron, the EPS may be off, making thevehicle harder to steer.

279

Electric Power Steering(EPS) Indicator

Brake SystemIndicator(Amber)


Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

U.S. Canada

０８／０７／１９　０９：３５：０２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００６８　

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time or it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA system. Takeyour vehicle to a dealer to have itchecked. Without VSA, your vehiclestill has normal driving ability, butwill not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

This indicator has three functions:

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. For more information, seepage .

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

1.

2.

3.

285

285

If equipped If equipped

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator


64

０８／０７／１９　０９：３５：１１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００６９　

To switch the information displaybetween the odometer, trip meter,outside temperature, and engine oillife and maintenance item code(s),press the SEL/RESET buttonrepeatedly.

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures in miles orkilometers. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincialregulations to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.

Odometer

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

65

TRIP METER

SEL/RESET BUTTON DISPLAY CHANGE BUTTON

TACHOMETER

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS CONTROL BUTTONS

INFORMATIONDISPLAY

FUEL GAUGE

ODOMETER/OUTSIDETEMPERATURE INDICATOR

CURRENT FUEL MILEAGE/TEMPERATURE GAUGE

SPEEDOMETER

０８／０７／１９　０９：３５：１７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００７０　

Every time you press the displaychange button, the display changesfrom the current fuel mileage to thetemperature gauge, or from thetemperature gauge to the currentfuel mileage.

Press and hold the display changebutton until you hear a beep. Eachtime you press the button, thespeedometer, trip meter, averagefuel mileage and current fuelmileage readings switches theirmeasures.

Depending on the selected measures(mph or km/h), the trip meter andodometer readings are shown withmiles or km. The average fuelmileage and current fuel mileage areshown with mpg or l/100 km.

This display shows the current, orinstant fuel mileage you are getting.

It shows the number of mpg or l/100km.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the reading should be inthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the reading may reach nearthe red mark. If it reaches the red(Hot) mark, pull safely to the side ofthe road. See page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

333

Display Change Button Current Fuel Mileage Temperature Gauge

Gauges

66

０８／０７／１９　０９：３５：２５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００７１　

When either of the trip meters (tripA or trip B) is displayed, yourvehicle’s average fuel mileage sinceyou last reset that trip meter can beshown on the information display(mpg or l/100km). This number isupdated once per 10 seconds. To seethe average fuel mileage, press andrelease the SEL/RESET buttonrepeatedly.

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount.

The average fuel mileage will bereset when you reset the trip meter,or if the vehicle’s battery goes deador is disconnected.

This meter shows the number ofmiles or kilometers driven since youlast reset it.

There are two trip meters: TRIP Aand TRIP B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the SEL/RESET button repeatedly.

Each trip meter works independently,so you can keep track of twodifferent distances.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0.’’

Average Fuel Mileage Fuel GaugeTrip Meter

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

０８／０７／１９　０９：３５：３４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００７２　

± ±

－－－－－－－－

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up to 5°F ( 3°C) warmer orcooler.

The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

Select the outside temperaturedisplay, then press and hold theSEL/RESET button for 10 seconds.The following sequence will appearfor 1 second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 5,

4, 3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2,3, 3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

When it reaches the desired value,release the SEL/RESET button. Youshould see the new outsidetemperature displayed.

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.models) or Celsius (Canadianmodels). To see the outsidetemperature, press and release theSEL/RESET button until thetemperature is shown on theinformation display.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the roadsurface, engine heat, and theexhaust from surrounding traffic.This can cause an incorrecttemperature reading when yourspeed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).

The sensor delays the display updateuntil it reaches the correct outsidetemperature. This may take severalminutes.

Outside Temperature Indicator

Gauges

68

NOTE:

０８／０７／１９　０９：３５：４１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００７３　

The information display in theinstrument panel shows you theengine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page formore information.

Your vehicle’s onboard diagnosticsystem will detect a loose or missingfuel fill cap as an evaporative systemleak. The first time a leak is detecteda ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messageappears on the information display.Turn the engine off, and confirm thefuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosenit, then retighten it until it clicks atleast once. The message should gooff after several days of normaldriving once you tighten or replacethe fuel fill cap. To scroll to anotherdisplay, press the SEL/RESETbutton. The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’message will appear each time yourestart the engine until the systemturns the message off.

If the system still detects a leak inthe vehicle’s evaporative emissionssystem, the malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fillcap was not already tightened, turnthe engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL shouldgo off after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If the MIL does not go off,have your vehicle inspected by adealer. For more information, seepage .337

289

Maintenance MinderCheck Fuel Cap Message

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

69

０８／０７／１９　０９：３５：４６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００７４　

This gauge shows you the state ofcharge of the battery for theIntegrated Motor Assist (IMA). Thisbattery is recharged by the IMAmotor, and discharged by the IMAwhen it is assisting the engine withpowering the vehicle.

Since the level is not read directly,small sensing errors can, over time,cause the gauge to read higher thanthe actual battery level. The systemwill then perform a correction, andthe battery level gauge reading willdrop suddenly. When this happens,IMA assist and Auto Idle Stop aredisabled until the IMA battery issufficiently recharged by normaldriving. This should take only a fewminutes.

This correction of the battery levelgauge is normal and does notindicate a problem. If the IMAbattery develops a problem orbecomes deteriorated, the IMAsystem indicator will come on. If thishappens, have the vehicle checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

The gauge reading may drop nearthe bottom under driving conditionsthat require IMA motor assistancefor a long time, such as prolongedacceleration or climbing a long hill.The IMA motor will recharge thebattery as you continue driving.

The IMA battery is charged at ahigher rate when the transmission isin LOW (L) range (see page ).

If the battery is mostly discharged,the Auto Idle Stop function isdisabled (see page ).

The battery level gauge does notread the battery level directly. Itcalculates the level by continuouslymeasuring the current flow, voltage,and temperature.

274

276

IMA Battery Level Gauge

Gauges

70

BATTERY LEVEL GAUGE

０８／０７／１９　０９：３５：５４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００７５　

This gauge shows you the status ofthe Integrated Motor Assist (IMA).When the IMA battery is beingcharged, the bottom side of thegauge illuminates. When the IMA isassisting the engine, the upper sideof the gauge illuminates.

If the IMA battery is too hot or toocold, the IMA system limits the IMAbattery’s output power to protect thebattery. This disables the IMA assistand Auto Idle Stop, even though theBattery Level Gauge may show thatthe battery is well-charged.Therefore, if the motor assist isfrequently used, the batterybecomes hot and starts to limit itsoutput power.

It takes the IMA system a fewminutes in cold weather to normalizethe IMA battery’s output power, andabout 15 minutes in hot weather.

Charge/Assist Gauge

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

71

IMA ASSIST GAUGE

IMA CHARGE GAUGE

０８／０７／１９　０９：３５：５９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００７６　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊＊＊ Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system, refer to the navigation system manual.

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.1 :2 :3 :4 :

If equippedCanadian model only

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

72

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

(P. 31)

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

(P. 96)

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

SEL/RESET BUTTON

DISPLAY CHANGE BUTTON

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE(P. 176) HORN

Vehicle with navigation system is shown.

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALWINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS (P. 75)

(P. 66)

(P. 65)

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST(VSA ) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH(P. 286)

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLBUTTONS(P. 210)

BLUETOOTHHANDSFREELINK SYSTEMVOICE CONTROL BUTTONS(P. 219)

(P. 74)(P. 73)

(P. 76)

(P. 77)HEATED MIRRORS

(P. 214)NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICECONTROL BUTTONS (P. 219)

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENTS(P. 77)

1

2

4

4

3

4

０８／０７／１９　０９：３６：０７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００７７　

－－－

－

－

－

－

－

－

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release thelever.

The wipers are not activated.

The length of the wiperinterval is variedautomatically according tothe vehicle’s speed.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

Pull thewiper control lever toward you,and hold it. The washers sprayuntil you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed, thencomplete one more sweep afteryou release the lever.

Vary the delay by turning theadjustment ring. If you turn it tothe shortest delay( position), the wiperschange to low speed operationwhen the vehicle speed exceeds 12mph (20 km/h).

While the vehicle is stopped and ingear, the wipers sweep thewindshield whenever you removeyour foot from the brake pedal.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

MIST

OFF

INT

LO

HI

Windshield Washers

Windshield Wipers and Washers

Instruments

andC

ontrols

73

ADJUSTMENT RING

０８／０７／１９　０９：３６：１７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００７８　

－

－

－

Turn signalOffParking and interior lightsHeadlightsHigh beamsFlash high beams

Push down on thelever to signal a left turn and up tosignal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever,and hold it. The lever will return tocenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

Turning the switch tothe ‘‘ ’’ position turns on theparking lights, taillights,instrument panel lights, side-marker lights, and rear licenseplate lights.

When the light switch is in the‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, thelights on indicator comes on as areminder. This indicator stays onif you leave the light switch on andturn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)position.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights.

If you leave the lights on with thekey removed from the ignitionswitch, you will hear a reminderchime when you open the driver’sdoor.

Push the leverforward and the high beamindicator will come on (see page

). Pull it back to return to lowbeams.

To flash the high beams, pull thelever back lightly, then release it.The high beams will stay on aslong as you hold the lever back.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

60

Turn Signals and Headlights

Turn Signal

Headlights

High Beams

74

０８／０７／１９　０９：３６：２４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００７９　

＋－

The buttons under the left side ventcontrol the brightness of theinstrument panel. Push the orbutton to adjust the brightness.

With the headlight switch off orposition, the high beam

headlights come on with reducedbrightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

There are six brightness levels.When you push either button, theinformation display indicates thecurrent level. You will hear a tonewhen you reach the maximum orminimum brightness. The displayreturns to the odometer 5 seconds

after you stop adjusting thebrightness.

To reduce glare at night, theinstrument panel illumination dimswhen you turn the light switch to the

or position.

The center of each meter (upper andlower) illuminates with reducedbrightness when you unlock andopen the driver’s door, and then goesback to the selected brightness whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position.

If you insert the key but do not turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, the illumination turns off inabout 10 seconds.

Daytime Running Lights Instrument Panel Brightness

Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness

Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESSCONTROL BUTTONS

０８／０７／１９　０９：３６：３２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００８０　

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side-to-side.

Pushing this button also turns themirror heaters on or off. For moreinformation, see page .

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicator inthe button comes on to show thedefogger is on. If you do not turn itoff, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignitionswitch. You have to turn thedefogger on again when you restartthe vehicle.

Push the button to turn on thehazard warning lights (four-wayflashers). This causes all fouroutside turn signals and both turnindicators in the instrument panel toflash. Use the hazard warning lightsif you need to park in a dangerousarea near heavy traffic, or if yourvehicle is disabled.

99

On Canadian models

Rear Window DefoggerHazard Warning Button

Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger

76

Canadianmodel

U.S. model

０８／０７／１９　０９：３６：３９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００８１　

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Move the steering wheel up ordown, and in or out, so it pointstoward your chest, not towardyour face. Make sure you can seethe instrument panel gauges andindicators.

1.

4.

2.

3.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

Instruments

andC

ontrols

77

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

０８／０７／１９　０９：３６：４６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００８２　

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The keys without a remotetransmitter do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle.

The valet key works only in theignition and the door locks. You cankeep the trunk and trunk releasehandle locked when you leave yourvehicle and the valet key at a parkingfacility.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your set of keys.You will need this key number if youever have to get a key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.

Keys and Locks

78

KEYNUMBERTAG

VALETKEY(Gray)

MASTER KEYSWITH REMOTETRANSMITTER

０８／０７／１９　０９：３６：５４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００８３　

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle inoperable.

If you have lost your key and cannotstart your engine, contact yourdealer.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come onbriefly, then go off. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position, remove the key,reinsert it, and turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer System

Instruments

andC

ontrols

79

Always take the ignition key with youwhenever you leave the vehicle alone.

０８／０７／１９　０９：３７：０２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００８４　

－

－

－

－

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the LOCK (0) orthe ACCESSORY (I) position andopen the driver’s door. Remove thekey to turn off the beeper.

The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, the shift lever mustbe in Park, and you must push thekey in slightly.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

LOCK (0)

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)

Ignition Switch

80

０８／０７／１９　０９：３７：０９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００８５　

To lock the doors when getting outof the vehicle, remove the key fromthe ignition switch, and push the topof the master door lock switch, thenclose the door.

With any door open and the key inthe ignition, both master door lockswitches and driver’s door lock tabare disabled. They are not disabledwhen all the doors are closed, orwhen the key is not in the ignition.

To lock any door when getting out ofthe vehicle, pull the lock tab out, andclose the door.

Each front door has a master doorlock switch. Either switch locks andunlocks all doors. Push the top of theswitch to lock all doors; push thebottom to unlock them.

The lock tab on each door locks andunlocks that door. Pulling out on thedriver’s door lock tab locks all doors.To unlock the driver’s door from theoutside, turn the key and release it.If you turn it again, all the doorsunlock.

Each door has a lock tab next to theinside door handle. Pull out the tabto lock the door, and push it in tounlock.

Lockout Prevention

Power Door Locks

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

81

LOCK TAB

To lock

To unlock

To lock

To unlock

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

０８／０７／１９　０９：３７：１７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００８６　

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, push the locktab in, and use the outside doorhandle.

Your vehicle has customizablesettings for the doors toautomatically lock and unlock. Thereare default settings for each of thesefeatures. You can turn off or changethe settings for these features asdescribed on the following pages.

The auto door locking feature hasthree possible settings:

The auto door locking isdeactivated all the time.

The doors lock whenever youmove the shift lever out of thePark (P) position.

The doors lock when the vehiclespeed reaches 9 mph (15 km/h).This is the default setting.

When you customize the setting,make sure your vehicle is parkedsafely, the engine is off, and theparking brake is applied. Make allsettings before you start driving.

Childproof Door Locks Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Auto Door Locking

Door Locks

82

LEVERUnlock

Lock

０８／０７／１９　０９：３７：２７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００８７　

Locks all doors when the shift lever ismoved out of the Park (P) position.

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door until you hear a click(after about 5 seconds).

Release the switch, and within 5seconds, turn the ignition switchto the LOCK (0) position.

Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and open the driver’sdoor.


Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and make sure toclose the driver’s door.

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

To turn off the Auto Door Lockmodes:

To program the Park Lock mode:

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

83

０８／０７／１９　０９：３７：３６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００８８　

Push and hold the brake pedal,and move the shift lever out of thePark (P) position.

Release the switch and, within 5seconds, turn the ignition switchto the ACCESSORY (I) position.Move the shift lever to the Park(P) position.

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Keep holding the switch until youhear another click (after about 5seconds).


Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Keep holding the switch until youhear another click (after about 5seconds).

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.



1.

2.

3.

5.

4.

6.

3.

4.

Locks all doors when the vehicle’s speedreaches about 9 mph (15 km/h).

To program the Drive Lock mode:

Door Locks

84

０８／０７／１９　０９：３７：４５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００８９　

Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click,and after about 5 seconds, you willhear another click.

The auto door unlocking feature hasfive possible settings:

The driver’s door unlocks whenyou move the shift lever to thePark (P) position.

The auto door unlocking isdeactivated all the time.


All doors unlock whenever youturn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) position.

The driver’s door unlockswhenever you turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I)position.

All doors unlock when you movethe shift lever to the Park (P)position.

This is the default setting.


Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and open the driver’sdoor.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

To turn off the Auto Door Unlockmodes:

Auto Door Unlocking

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

85

０８／０７／１９　０９：３７：５５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００９０　

－

－

Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Continue to hold down the switch:

Until you hear another click(after about 5 seconds) toactivate





Or, until you hear two moreclicks (after about 10 seconds)to activate


1.

2.

4.

3.

1.

2.

Unlocks the driver’s door or all doorswhen the shift lever is moved into thePark (P) position.

driver’s door unlockfeature.

Unlocks the driver’s door or all doorswhen the ignition switch is moved out ofthe ON (II) position.

all doors unlock feature.

To program the Park Unlock mode: To program the Ignition SwitchUnlock mode:

Door Locks

86

０８／０７／１９　０９：３８：０６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００９１　

－

－

Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Continue to hold the switch:

Release the switch and, within 5seconds, turn the ignition switchto the ACCESSORY (I) position.Move the shift lever to the Park(P) position.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.

Push and hold the brake pedal,then move the shift lever out ofthe Park (P) position.

Even if your vehicle’s battery isremoved or goes dead, the systemkeeps the auto door lock/unlocksetting which you selected.

Until you hear another click(after about 5 seconds) toactivate

Or, until you hear two moreclicks (after about 10 seconds)to activate

5.

4.

6.

3.

driver’s door unlockfeature.

all doors unlock feature.

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

87

０８／０７／１９　０９：３８：１３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００９２　

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature. For more informationabout child safety, see page .

To open the trunk, pull the trunkrelease handle on the left side of thedriver’s seat. To protect items in thetrunk when you need to give the keyto someone else, lock the trunkrelease handle with the master key,and give the other person the valetkey.

As a safety feature, your vehicle hasa release lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from theinside. To open the trunk, push therelease lever to the left.

Press and hold the trunk releasebutton on the remote transmitter.

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

Keep the trunk lid closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging it,and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

, page .

38

52

Emergency Trunk Opener

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

Trunk

88

MASTER KEY

TRUNK RELEASEHANDLE

RELEASE LEVER

PULL

０８／０７／１９　０９：３８：２１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００９３　

－

－－

－

Press this button once tolock all doors. Some exterior lightswill flash once. When you pushLOCK twice within 5 seconds, youwill hear a horn to verify that thedoors are locked. You cannot lockthe doors if any door is not fullyclosed or the key is in the ignitionswitch.

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the other doors.Some exterior lights will flash twiceeach time you press the button. Thisbutton does not work when the keyis in the ignition switch.

The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the door activatedposition) will come on when youpress the UNLOCK button. If you donot open any door, the light stays onfor about 30 seconds, then fades out.If you relock the doors with theremote transmitter before 30seconds have elapsed, the light goesoff immediately.

If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openany of the doors within 30 seconds,the doors automatically relock andthe security system will also set.

Press this button forabout 1 second to attract attention;the horn will sound and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If you push the LOCK button twicewithin 5 seconds, you will hear ahorn to verify that the securitysystem has set.

Press thisbutton for about 1 second to openthe trunk. You cannot open the trunkif the key is in the ignition switch.

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

LOCK

UNLOCK PANIC

TRUNK RELEASE

Remote Transmitter Care

Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

89

LOCKBUTTON

PANIC BUTTON

TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON

０８／０７／１９　０９：３８：３１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００９４　

To replace the battery:

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.

Battery type: CR1616

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.

1.

2.

3.

Replacing the TransmitterBattery

Remote Transmitter

90

SCREW

BATTERY

TAB

０８／０７／１９　０９：３８：３９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００９５　

－

＋

To adjust the seat forward orbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position, andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

Remove the old battery from theback of the inner cover, and notethe polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame ( side facing down), theninsert it into the back of the cover.

An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulationsfor battery disposal.

Install the parts in reverse order.

Make all adjustments before youstart driving.

4.

5.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.




1311

CONTINUED

Front Seat Adjustments

Remote Transmitter, Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

91

０８／０７／１９　０９：３８：４８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００９６　

To change the seat-back angle of thefront seat, pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat bottom.

Once a seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. To raise the seat,repeatedly pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat cushion. To lowerthe seat, push the lever downrepeatedly.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning aboutimproperly positioning head restraints.

13Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment Head Restraints

Seats

92

０８／０７／１９　０９：３８：５５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００９７　

When a passenger is seated in therear center seating position, makesure the center head restraint isadjusted to its highest position.

The head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust arestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways, and pushthe restraint down.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the center of the backof the occupant’s head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

Adjusting the Head Restraint

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

93

Rear Center PositionCUSHION

CUSHION LEG

LEGS RELEASEBUTTONSEAT-BACK SEAT-BACK RELEASE BUTTON

Front

０８／０７／１９　０９：３９：０２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００９８　

This reduces the distance betweenthe restraint and the occupant’s head.It also helps protect the occupantsagainst whiplash and injuries to theneck and upper spine.

After a collision, the activatedrestraint should return to its normalposition.

If the restraints do not return to theirnormal position, or in the event of asevere collision, have the vehicleinspected by a Honda dealer.

The driver’s and front passenger’sseats have active head restraints. Ifthe vehicle is struck severely fromthe rear, the occupant properlysecured with the seat belt will bepushed against the seat-back and thehead restraint will automaticallymove forward.

To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release button,then pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

When reinstalling a head restraint,put the legs back in place. Thenadjust it to the appropriate heightwhile pressing the release button.

Make sure the head restraint locksin position when you reinstall it.

Active Head RestraintsRemoving the Head Restraint

Seats

94

Failure to reinstall the headrestraints can result in severeinjury during a crash.

Always replace the headrestraints before driving.

０８／０７／１９　０９：３９：１１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　００９９　

The lid of the console compartmentcan be used as an armrest by movingit forward and backward. Make surethe armrest is securely latched.

Make sure your passenger’s handsor fingers are away from the armrestbefore moving it.

For a head restraint system to workproperly:

Do not hang any items on the headrestraints, or from the restraintlegs.

Do not place any object betweenan occupant and the seat-back.

Install each restraint in its properlocation.

Only use genuine Hondareplacement head restraints.

Armrest

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

95

０８／０７／１９　０９：３９：１８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１００　

In the HI setting, the heater turns offwhen the seat gets warm, and turnsback on after the seat’s temperaturedrops.

In the LO setting, the heater runscontinuously. It does not cycle withtemperature changes.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

Push the front of the switch, HI, torapidly heat up the seat. After theseat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushingthe back of the switch. This will keepthe seat warm.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. Because of the sensorsfor the side airbag cutoff system,there is no heater in the passenger’sseat-back. The ignition switch mustbe in the ON (II) position to use theheaters.

If equipped

Seat Heaters

96

Passenger’sSeat

Driver’sSeatHEATERS SEAT HEATER SWITCH

０８／０７／１９　０９：３９：２６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１０１　

－

－

To open or close thedriver’s window, push or pull thewindow switch firmly down or up tothe second detent, and release it.The window will automatically godown or up all the way. To stop thewindow, pull or push the windowswitch briefly.

If the driver’swindow senses any obstacle while itis closing automatically, it willreverse direction, and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

If the MAIN switch is OFF, thepassenger windows cannot be raisedor lowered. Keep the MAIN switchoff when you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower anywindow. To open the window, pushthe switch down and hold it. Releasethe switch when you want to stop thewindow. To close the window, pullback on the switch and hold it.

The windows operate for up to 10minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either frontdoor cancels this function.

AUTO

AUTO REVERSE

Power Windows

Instruments

andC

ontrols

97

DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

０８／０７／１９　０９：３９：３３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１０２　

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns theadjustment switch off to keep yoursettings.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

3.

4.

1.

2.

Mirrors

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

98

ADJUSTMENT SWITCHSELECTOR SWITCH

TAB

０８／０７／１９　０９：３９：４１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１０３　

On Canadian modelsThe outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off. Pressing this button alsoturns the rear window defogger onand off.

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brakeindicator on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released (see page ).58

Heated Mirrors Parking Brake

Mirrors, Parking Brake

Instruments

andC

ontrols

99

PARKING BRAKE LEVERHEATED MIRROR BUTTON

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and hubs. A beeper will sound ifthe vehicle is driven with the parkingbrake on.

０８／０７／１９　０９：３９：４８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１０４　

＊

＊

Interior Convenience Items

100

COIN BOX CENTER POCKET

GLOVE BOX

BEVERAGE HOLDERS

VANITY MIRROR


CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

COAT HOOK


: If equipped

USB ADAPTER CABLE

０８／０７／１９　０９：３９：５３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１０５　

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids candamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

To open the console compartment,pull up on the lever, and lift the lid.

To close, lower the lid, and push itdown until it latches.

Open the front beverage holder bysliding its cover backward.

This socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps). It will not power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement.

To use an accessory power socket,the ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

Another accessory power socket is inthe center console compartment.When more than one socket is beingused, the combined power rating ofthe accessories should be 120 wattsor less (10 amps).

Open the glove box by pulling thehandle to the left. Close it with a firmpush.

On models without navigation systemBeverage Holders Console Compartment

Accessory Power Socket

Glove Box

Interior Convenience Items

Instruments

andC

ontrols

101

LEVER

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

ACCESSORYPOWER SOCKET

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

０８／０７／１９　０９：４０：０３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１０６　

Open any door.Unlock the doors with the key orremote transmitter.Remove the key from the ignition.

The front ceiling light has twospotlights. Push the spotlight lensesto turn them on and off.

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch: ON, Door Activated, andOFF. In the Door Activated (center)position, the light comes on whenyou:

If you leave either door open withoutthe key is in the ignition switch, theceiling light will go off after 3minutes.

After all doors are closed tightly, thelight dims slightly, then fades out inabout 30 seconds.

If you do not open any door after youunlock the driver’s door or removethe key from the ignition switch, thelight(s) fades out in about 30seconds.

Ceiling Light Spotlights

Interior Lights

102

DOOR ACTIVATED

ON

OFF

０８／０７／１９　０９：４０：１１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１０７　

The climate control system in yourvehicle provides a comfortabledriving environment in all weatherconditions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This sectiondescribes those features and how touse them. (If you have an optionalaudio system, refer to the operatinginstructions that came with it.)

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourvehicle.

.............................Climate Control . 104................................Audio System . 110

Audio System (Models without...................navigation system) . 112

..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 113.....................Adjusting the Sound . 115

................Playing the XM Radio . 116................................Playing a Disc . 121

.......Disc Player Error Messages . 128Optional Disc Changer Error

...................................Messages . 129............................Playing an iPod . 130

.................iPod Error Messages . 138Playing a USB Flash Memory

........................................Device . 139USB Flash Memory Device

........................Error Messages . 146Audio System (Models with

...................navigation system) . 147..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 148

................Playing the XM Radio . 151.....................Adjusting the Sound . 158

................................Playing a Disc . 160.......Disc Player Error Messages . 169

.........................Playing a PC Card . 170.............PC Card Error Messages . 182

............................Playing an iPod . 183.................iPod Error Messages . 192

Playing a USB Flash Memory........................................Device . 193

USB Flash Memory Device........................Error Messages . 203

............AM/FM Radio Reception . 204..................Protecting Your Discs . 206.................Radio Theft Protection . 209................Remote Audio Controls . 210

......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 211..........................Setting the Clock . 212

............................Security System . 213...............................Cruise Control . 214

.......Bluetooth HandsFreeLink . 217

Features

Features

103

０８／０７／１９　０９：４０：１７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１０８　

Climate Control

104

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

FAN CONTROL DIALTEMPERATURE CONTROLDIAL

AUTO BUTTON

MODE CONTROL BUTTON

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

FRESH AIR BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

WINDSHIELD DEFROST BUTTON

OFF BUTTON

０８／０７／１９　０９：４０：２１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１０９　

Only on models equipped withNavigation SystemThe climate control system for yourvehicle can also be operated usingthe voice control system. See theNavigation section in your QuickStart Guide for an overview of thissystem and the Navigation Systemmanual for complete details.

The automatic climate controlsystem adjusts the fan speed andairflow levels to maintain the interiortemperature you select.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in full automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled.

Making any manual selection causesthe word AUTO in the display to goout.

Turn this dial to increase or decreasethe fan speed and airflow.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

Set the desired temperature byturning the temperature controldial. You will see AUTO in thesystem’s display.

Press the AUTO button.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit ( ) or its upper limit( ), the system runs at fullcooling or heating only. It does notregulate the interior temperature.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until theheater starts to develop warm air.

In ‘‘AUTO’’ mode, the air conditionermay not work if the humidity insidethe vehicle is low. To activate the airconditioner, press A/C button.

Voice Control System Semi-automatic Operation

Using Automatic Climate Control Fan Control Dial

Temperature Control Dial

Climate Control

Features

105

０８／０７／１９　０９：４０：３４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１１０　

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and defroster vents atthe base of the windshield.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.

In AUTO mode, the system controlsthe airflow direction automaticallybetween the dashboard vents andthe floor vents.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. Theindicator in the button is on whenthe A/C is on.

When the recirculation indicator ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.To select recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

When the flesh air indicator is on, airis brought in from the outside of thevehicle.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Use the mode control buttons toselect the vents air flows from. Someair will flow from the dashboardcorner vents in all modes.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents. When you select , thesystem automatically switches tofresh air mode.

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Recirculation Button

Fresh Air Button

Mode Control Button

Climate Control

106

０８／０７／１９　０９：４０：４８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１１１　

Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereading returns to normal.

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on when a fan speed isselected.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in fresh air mode.

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry andcan prevent the windows fromfogging up.

Select .When you select , the systemautomatically switches to the freshair mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

Turn the fan on.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then releases itthrough vents near the rear window.

1.2.3.4.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.1.

2.3.

1.

2.3.4.

66

If the interior is very warm,

Climate Control

Ventilation

Using the Heater

Using the A/C Dehumidify the Interior

Features

107

０８／０７／１９　０９：４１：０１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１１２　

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel below each vent.This sends more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents. Once thewindshield is clear, select fresh airmode to avoid fogging the windows.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

Select . When you select, the system automatically

switches to fresh air mode andturns on the A/C. The A/Cindicator will not come on, if it waspreviously off.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

Set the fan to the desired speed, orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . When you select

, the system automaticallyswitches to fresh air mode andturns on the A/C. The A/Cindicator will not come on, if it waspreviously off.Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.3.

Climate Control

To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

108

０８／０７／１９　０９：４１：０８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１１３　

Press the OFF button. However, alack of airflow can cause thewindows to fog up. You should keepthe fan on at all times so stale air andmoisture do not build up in theinterior and cause fogging.

To regulate the interior temperatureand humidity, the climate controlsystem has two sensors. A sunlightsensor is located in the top of thedashboard and a temperature/humidity sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

To Turn Everything Off Sunlight, Temperature, andHumidity Sensors

Climate Control

Features

109

TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSORSUNLIGHT SENSOR

０８／０７／１９　０９：４１：１３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１１４　

Read the appropriate pages in thissection for operation of the audiosystems installed in your vehicle.

For vehicles without navigationsystem, see pages through .

For vehicles with navigation system,see pages through .

If your vehicle has a different audiosystem, refer to its manual foroperating instructions.

112 146

147 203

Audio System

110

On models without navigation system

０８／０７／１９　０９：４１：１９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１１５　

Audio System

Features

111

U.S. model with navigation system

０８／０７／１９　０９：４１：２２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１１６　

Audio System (Models without navigation system)

112

TUNE/SOUND KNOB

PWR/VOL KNOB

PRESET BUTTONS

SEEK BUTTON

AUTO SELECT BUTTONSCAN BUTTON AM/FM BUTTON

０８／０７／１９　０９：４１：２６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１１７　

－

－

－

－

－

CONTINUED

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency.

The seek functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or side of theSEEK bar, then release it.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds.

Each side of the buttons(1 through 6) can store onefrequency on AM, and twofrequencies on FM.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

Pick a preset number (1 6), andhold it until you hear a beep.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storesix stations each.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: thepreset buttons, and .

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Turn the system on bypushing the PWR/VOL knob or theAM/FM button. Adjust the volumeby turning the same knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction in AM is not available.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To Select a Station

TUNE

SEEK

SCAN

Preset

To Play the AM/FM Radio

TUNE, SEEK, SCAN,AUTO SELECT

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)

Features

113

０８／０７／１９　０９：４１：３６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１１８　

－

To turn off auto select, press theA. SEL (auto select) button. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM, and twelve FM stations inthe preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forthat preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

For information on AM/FM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.204

AUTO SELECT

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)

114

０８／０７／１９　０９：４１：４１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１１９　

－

－

－

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control buttons to adjustthe illumination of the audio system(see page ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is off.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BALANCE adjusts the side-to-sidestrength, while FADER adjusts thefront-to-back strength.

The SVCmode controls the volume based onvehicle speed. The faster you go, thelouder the audio volume becomes.As you slow down, the audio volumedecreases.

The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. The default setting is MID.Turn the SOUND (TUNE) knob toadjust the setting to your liking.If you feel the sound is too loud,choose low. If you feel the sound istoo quiet, choose high.

Press the SOUND (TUNE) knobrepeatedly to display the BASS,TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, andSVC (speed-sensitive volumecompensation) settings.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the SOUND(TUNE) knob to adjust the setting toyour liking. When the level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’ inthe display. The system willautomatically return the display tothe selected audio mode about 5seconds after you stop adjusting amode.

Use the TREBLE/BASS modes to adjust the tone toyour liking.

75

Audio System LightingBalance/Fader

Speed-sensitive volumecompensation (SVC)

Treble/Bass

Adjusting the Sound (Models without navigation system)

Features

115

０８／０７／１９　０９：４１：４９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１２０　

Your audio system is capable ofreceiving XM Radio anywhere in theUnited States, except Hawaii andAlaska.

XM is a registered trademark ofXM Satellite Radio , Inc.

XM Radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM Radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.

Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)

Optional on U.S. models

116

DISPLAY BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

CD BUTTON

TUNE KNOB

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

AUX BUTTON

０８／０７／１９　０９：４１：５５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１２１　

－

－

－ You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

Turn the TUNE knob tochange channel selections. Turn theknob right for higher numberedchannels and left for lowernumbered channels. In the categorymode, you can only select channelswithin that category.

Press either side of the CATEGORYbutton ( or ) to selectanother category.

In channel mode, you can select allof the available channels. In categorymode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,etc., you can select all of thechannels within that category.

To listen to XM Radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position. Push thepower/volume knob to turn on theaudio system, and press the ‘‘AUX’’button. Adjust the volume by turningthe knob. The last channel youlistened to will show in the display.

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,press and hold the DISP button untilthe mode changes.

Each time you press and release theDISP button, the display changes inthe following sequence: Channelname, channel number, category,artist name, and music title.

CONTINUED

Operating the XM Radio

TUNE

SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)

MODE


Features

117

０８／０７／１９　０９：４２：０２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１２２　

－

－

－

－

－

－

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button. Thesystem plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want tocontinue listening to, press thebutton again.

You can store up to 12preset channels using each side ofthe preset button. Each side of thebutton stores one channel from theXM1 band and one channel from theXM2 band.

To store a channel:

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune to a desiredchannel.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

XM is loading theaudio or program information.

The channelcurrently selected is no longerbroadcasting.

The encryptioncode is being updated. Wait until theencryption code is fully updated.Channels 0 and 1 should still worknormally.

The signal iscurrently too weak. Move the vehicleto an area away from tall buildings,and with an unobstructed view of thesouthern horizon.

Pick a preset number you want forthat channel. Press and hold thebutton until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Once a channel is stored, press andrelease the proper side of the presetbutton to tune to it.Press the AUX button. Either XM1

or XM2 will show in the display.

Press the AUX button again. Storethe next six channels using steps 2and 3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

SCAN

Preset

XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘UPDATING’’

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’


118

０８／０７／１９　０９：４２：１２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１２３　

－

－

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.

The selected channelnumber does not exist, or is not partof your subscription, or this channelhas no artist or title information atthis time.

There is a problemwith the XM antenna. Please consultyour dealer.

CONTINUED

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’


Features

119

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

０８／０７／１９　０９：４２：１９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１２４　

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

Large items carried on a roof rack.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM Radioreception.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Radio. With the ignitionswitch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON(II) position, push the power/volumeknob to turn on the audio system andpress the AUX button. A variety ofmusic types and styles will play.

If you decide to purchase XM radioservice, contact XM Radio at

, or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, turn the TUNEknob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.

Your I.D. will appear in the display.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in thesatellite radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, you’ll beable to listen to XM Radio broadcasts.XM Radio will continue to send anactivation signal to your vehicle forat least 12 hours from the activationrequest. If the service has not beenactivated after 36 hours, contactXM Radio.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com

Receiving XM Radio Service


120

０８／０７／１９　０９：４２：２９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１２５　

Playing a Disc (Models without navigation system)

Features

121

REPEATBUTTON

FOLDER KNOBPWR/VOL KNOB

CD BUTTON

DISPLAYBUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

LOAD INDICATOR

SCAN BUTTON

EJECT BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BUTTON

０８／０７／１９　０９：４２：３３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１２６　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

To load or play discs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

You operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio. Toselect the CD player, press the CDbutton. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in thedisplay. The number of the trackplaying is shown in the display. Thesystem will continuously play a discuntil you change modes.

The specifications for compatibleMP3 files are:

Insert the disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way and begin toplay it. When the system reaches theend of the disc, it will return to thebeginning and play the disc again.

The disc player can also play CD-Rsand CD-RWs compressed in CD-TEXT, MP3, and WMA formats.When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA,you will see ‘‘MP3’’ or ‘‘WMA’’ in thedisplay. You can select up to 255folders or tracks.

Video CDs and DVDs will not workin this unit.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

The specifications for compatibleWMA files are:

Compatible with variable bitrateand multi-session

Bitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1)8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)

Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

Bitrate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz

Compatible with variable bitrateand multi-sessionMaximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM/FM button.Press the CD button again to switchback to the disc player.

To Play a Disc


122

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

０８／０７／１９　０９：４２：４６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１２７　

＞

Each time you press the DISP button,the display shows you the text dataon a disc, if the disc was recordedwith text data.

You can see the album, artist, andtrack name in the display. If a disc isrecorded in MP3 or WMA, you cansee the folder and file name, and theartist, album, and track tag.

With the folder name, you will seethe FOLDER indicator in the display.The TRACK indicator is shown withthe file or track name.

The display shows up to 16characters of selected text data (thefolder name, file name, etc.). If thetext data has more than 16characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold the DISPbutton until the next 16 charactersare shown.

You will also see some text dataunder these conditions:

When a new folder, file, or track isselected.

When you change the audio modeto play a disc with text data or inMP3 or WMA.

Use the SEEK/SKIP button while adisc is playing to select passages andchange tracks (files in MP3/WMAmode).

When you insert a disc, and thesystem begins to play.

When playing a CD-DA with textdata, the album and track name areshown in the display. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, the display shows thefolder and file name.

In MP3/WMA mode, use theFOLDER knob to select folders onthe disc, and use the SEEK/SKIPbutton to change files.

CONTINUED

To Change or Select Tracks/FilesText Data Display Function


Features

123

０８／０７／１９　０９：４２：５６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１２８　

－－－

Each time youpress and release the side ofthe SEEK/SKIP button, the playerskips forward to the beginning of thenext track (file in MP3 or WMAmode). Press and release the

side to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to skip to the beginning ofthe previous track.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or side of theSEEK/SKIP button.

Toselect a different folder, turn theTUNE knob to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Turnthe knob to the right to skip to thenext folder, and to the left to move tothe beginning of the current folder.Turn it again to skip to the beginningof the previous folder. Turning theTUNE knob more than one clickskips several folders at a time.

To continuously replaya track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),press and release the RPT button.You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in the display.Press and hold the RPT button for 2seconds to turn it off.

In MP3 or WMA modeSEEK/SKIPFOLDER SELECTION

REPEAT (TRACK/FILEREPEAT)


124

０８／０７／１９　０９：４３：０１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１２９　

－－－In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode

This feature,when activated, replays all files inthe selected folder in the order theyare compressed. To activate folderrepeat, press the RPT button twice.You will hear a beep and see F-RPTin the display. The systemcontinuously replays the currentfolder. Press the RPT button again toturn it off. Pressing the RDM button,or selecting a different folder withthe TUNE knob also turns off therepeat feature.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromfile repeat to folder repeat, then tonormal play.

This feature playsthe tracks within a disc (the fileswithin a folder in MP3 or WMAmode) in random order. To activaterandom play, press and release theRDM button. In MP3 or WMA mode,press the RDM button repeatedly toselect RDM (within a folder randomplay). You will see RDM in thedisplay. Press the RDM button for 2seconds to return to normal play.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays allfiles in each folder in random order.To activate folder random, press theRDM button twice. You will hear abeep and see F-RDM in the display.The system will then select and playfiles randomly. This continues untilyou deactivate folder random bypressing the RDM button again, orby selecting a different folder withthe TUNE knob.

Each time you press and release theRDM button, the mode changesfrom folder random play to randomplay (within a folder random play),then to normal play.

CONTINUED

FOLDER-REPEATRANDOM (Random within adisc/folder) FOLDER-RANDOM


Features

125

０８／０７／１９　０９：４３：０８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１３０　

－－

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP button also turns off the scanfeature.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom file scan to folder scan, then tonormal play.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadit after 10 seconds and put it in pausemode. To begin playing, press theCD button.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

The scan function samples all tracks(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc inthe order they are recorded on thedisc. To activate scan, press theSCAN button. In MP3 or WMAmode, press the SCAN buttonrepeatedly to select SCAN. You willsee SCAN in the display. You will geta 10 second sampling of each track/file on the disc. Press the SCANbutton again to get out of scan modeand play the last track/file sampled.

Thisfeature, when activated, samples thefirst file of each folder on the disc.To activate folder scan, press theSCAN button twice. You will seeF-SCAN in the display.

The system plays the first file in thefirst folder for about 10 seconds. Ifyou do nothing, the system will thenplay the first files in the next foldersfor 10 seconds. After playing the firstfile of the last folder, the systemplays normally.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP button, selecting a differentfolder with the TUNE knob, orpressing the SCAN button, also turnsoff the folder scan.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM/FM button.Press the AUX button to switch to anappropriate audio unit (if it isconnected to the auxiliary input jackor the USB adapter cable). Press theCD button again to switch back tothe disc player.

In MP3 or WMA mode To Stop Playing a DiscSCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN)


126

０８／０７／１９　０９：４３：１６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１３１　

－＋

－＋

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the disc willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the disc will beginplaying where it left off.

Load the desired discs in themagazine, and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.

To select the disc changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different disc, use the preset 4(DISC ) or the preset 1 (DISC )on the preset button. To select theprevious disc, press the preset 4(DISC ), or the preset 1 (DISC )to select the next disc in sequence.

If you select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will searchfor the next available disc to load andplay.

An optional six or eight disc changeris available for your vehicle. Thisdisc changer uses the same controlsused for the in-dash disc player orthe radio. For information on how to handle

and protect compact discs, see page.206

Operating the Optional DiscChanger

Protecting Discs


Features

127

０８／０７／１９　０９：４３：２３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１３２　

CauseThe chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.For additional information ondamaged discs, see page .

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.

Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

ErrorMessage

Solution

207

High Temperature

Track/File format notsupported

Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Current track will be skipped. The nextsupported track or file plays automatically.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt(see page 207). Insert the disc again. If the codedoes not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot beremoved, consult your dealer. Do not try toforce the disc out the player.

Disc Player Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

128

HEAT ERROR

FORMAT

BAD DISCPLEASE CHECK

OWNER’SMANUAL PUSH

EJECTBAD DISC

PLEASE CHECKOWNER’SMANUAL

０８／０７／１９　０９：４３：３０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１３３　

ErrorMessage

SolutionCauseThe chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.

If there is still a problem, the errormessage will appear again. Press theeject button, and pull out the disc.


Press the magazine eject button, and pull themagazine out. If the message does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,see your dealer.Insert disc.

Press the magazine eject button, pull themagazine out, check for an error message, theninsert the magazine again. If the message doesnot disappear, or the magazine cannot be pulledout, see your dealer.Insert disc magazine.

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

FOCUS Error

No disc in the discmagazine

Mechanical Error

No disc magazine in thedisc changerHigh Temperature

Optional Disc Changer Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

Features

129

０８／０７／１９　０９：４３：３８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１３４　

Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)

130

SEEK/SKIP BUTTON

RDM (RANDOM) BUTTON

RPT (REPEAT)BUTTON

iPod INDICATOR

AUXBUTTON

CDBUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

TUNE KNOB

DISP (DISPLAY)BUTTON

０８／０７／１９　０９：４３：４３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１３５　

＊

＊

The audio system reads and playssound files to be playable on the iPod.The system cannot operate an iPodas a mass storage device. Thesystem will only play songs stored onthe iPod with iTunes.

iPod and iTunes are registeredtrademarks owned by Apple Inc.

iPods that are compatible with youraudio system are listed below.

Use the latest firmware.

This audio system can select andplay the audio files on the iPod withthe same controls used for the discplayer. To play an iPod, connect it tothe USB adapter cable in the consolecompartment by using your dockconnector, then press the AUXbutton. The ignition switch must bein the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position. The iPod will also becharged with the ignition switch inthese positions.

Use only compatible iPods with thelatest firmware. iPods that are notcompatible will not work in this audiounit.

:

ModeliPod 5GiPod classiciPod nanoiPod nano2nd generationiPod nano3rd generationiPod touchiPhone

CONTINUED

FirmwareVer. 1.2 or moreVer. 1.0 or moreVer. 1.2 or moreVer. 1.1.2 or more

Ver. 1.0 or more

Ver. 1.1.1 or moreVer. 1.1.1 or more

To Play an iPod


Features

131

０８／０７／１９　０９：４３：５１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１３６　

Do not connect your iPod using ahub.

Do not keep the iPod in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage it.

Do not use an extension cablebetween the USB adapter cableequipped with your vehicle andyour dock connector.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing it.

In AAC format, DRM (digital rightsmanagement) files cannot be played.If the system finds a DRM file, theaudio unit displays UNPLAYABLE,and then skips to the next file.

Install the dock connector to theUSB adapter cable securely.

Connect your dock connector tothe iPod correctly and securely.

Pull out the USB connector fromthe holder and remove the cablefrom the clip in the consolecompartment.

1. 2.

3.


NOTE: Connecting an iPod

132

DOCK CONNECTOR

USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTERCABLE

CABLE

０８／０７／１９　０９：４４：００　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１３７　

＊

＊

＞If the audio system still does notrecognize the iPod, the iPod mayneed to be reset. Follow theinstructions that came with youriPod, or you can find resetinstructions online at

If the iPod indicator does not appearin the audio display, check theconnections, and try to reconnect theiPod a few times.

When the iPod is connected and theiPod mode is selected on the audiodisplay, ‘‘USB LOAD’’ is shown for afew seconds, then the iPod indicatoris shown in the display. In the radioor disc mode, the display shows a‘‘USB CONNECTED’’ message for afew seconds. After loading, you willsee the Honda mark on the iPod.That means you can only operateyour iPod with the vehicle’s audiounit.

It may take a few minutes forthe Honda mark to display onthe iPod. If the display does notchange, this function is notsupported on your iPod modelor firmware.

Each time you press the DISP button,the display mode switches betweenthe album name, the song/trackname, the artist name, or name off(which turns off the text display).

The display shows up to 16characters of the selected data. If thetext data has more than 16characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold the DISPbutton until the next 16 charactersare shown.

:

www.apple.com/ipod.

CONTINUED

Text Data Display Function


Features

133

Sample Display

OK to disconnect.

０８／０７／１９　０９：４４：０８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１３８　

－

You can use the SEEK/SKIP buttonwhile an iPod is playing to selectpassages and change files.

Each time you press andrelease the side of the SEEK/SKIP button, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nextfile. Press and release the sideof the button to skip backward to thebeginning of the current file. Press itagain to skip to the beginning of theprevious file.

To move rapidly within a file, pressand hold either side ( or )of the SEEK/SKIP button.

You can also select a file from theiPod menu: ALBUM (albums),SONG (songs), P-LIST (playlists),and ARTIST (artists), by using theTUNE knob. Push the TUNE(SOUND) knob to switch the displayto an iPod menu, then turn theTUNE knob to select a desired mode.If you stop adjusting, the displayedmode is selected after about fiveseconds. The system begins to playthe first file stored in the selected

mode.


To Change or Select Files To Select a File from iPod Menu

SKIP

134

Push the TUNE knob.

Turn the TUNE knob.

０８／０７／１９　０９：４４：１５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１３９　

－ Turnthe TUNE knob to select a differentitem in the selected mode. Theselected item will be shown on thedisplay for a few seconds. When youstop turning, the system begins toplay the first file from the selecteditem.

For example, with the album modeselected, turn the TUNE knob rightor left to select a different album.Turn to the right to skip to the nextalbum, and turn to the left to skip tothe previous album. When the albumis selected, the system begins to playthe first song on that album. Withthe artist mode, turning the knobselects a different artist.

If you select ‘‘ALL,’’ all available fileson the selected menu (album orartist) are played.

If you press and release the TUNE(SOUND) knob repeatedly, thedisplay switches from the iPod menuto the sound settings (see page ).115

CONTINUED


Selection within a Mode

Features

135

０８／０７／１９　０９：４４：２１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１４０　

－

－

－

You can select any type of repeat andshuffle modes by using the RPT andRDM buttons.

This featureplays all available files in a selectedmode (playlists, artists, albums orsongs) in random order. To activatethis, press and release the RDMbutton. You will see RDM in thedisplay.

Thisfeature plays all available albums in aselected mode (playlists, artists,albums or songs) in random order.The files in each album are played in

the recorded order. To activate this,press and release the RDM buttonrepeatedly until you see F-RDM inthe display.

Each time you press and release theRDM button, the mode changesfrom all random, to album random,then to normal play.

Press and hold the button until youhear a beep to turn off either randommode.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP button or turning the TUNEknob changes a file while keepingthe random function.

Available operating functions vary onmodels or versions. Some functionsmay not be available on the vehicle’saudio system.

Thisfeature continuously plays a file. Toactivate repeat, press and release theRPT button. You will see RPT in thedisplay. Press the button again toturn it off.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP button or turning the TUNEknob changes the file while keepingthe repeat feature.


To Select Repeat or Random Mode:

RDM (All Random)

F-RDM (Album Random)

NOTE:

RPT (Repeat one track)

136

RDM INDICATOR

０８／０７／１９　０９：４４：３０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１４１　

＊

＊

You can disconnect the iPod at anytime when you see the ‘‘OK todisconnect’’ message in the iPoddisplay. With the AUX mode, you willsee a ‘‘USB NO DATA’’ message inthe display. Always make sure yousee ‘‘OK to disconnect’’ in the iPoddisplay before you disconnect it.Make sure to follow the iPod’sinstructions on how to disconnectthe dock connector from the USBadapter cable.

The displayed message mayvary on models or versions. Onsome models, there is nomessage to disconnect.

If you reconnect the same iPod, thesystem may begin playing where itleft off, depending on what mode theiPod is in when it is reconnected.

If you see an error message in thedisplay, see page .

To play the radio, press the AM/FMbutton. Press the CD button toswitch to the disc mode (if a disc isloaded).

:

138


To Stop Playing Your iPod iPod Error MessagesDisconnecting an iPod

Features

137

０８／０７／１９　０９：４４：３７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１４２　

If you see an error message on theaudio display while playing an iPod,find the solution in the chart to theright. If you cannot clear the errormessage, take your vehicle to yourdealer.

SolutionError Message

The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the iPod. Thereis a possibility that the files have been damaged.Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.

iPod Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

138

UNSUPPORTED

UNSUPPORTED VER

０８／０７／１９　０９：４４：４１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１４３　

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)

Features

139

RDM (RANDOM) BUTTON

AUX BUTTONCD BUTTON

TUNE KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BUTTON

RPT (REPEAT)BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

DISP (DISPLAY)BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

０８／０７／１９　０９：４４：４５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１４４　

＊

＊

The recommended USB flashmemory devices are 256 Mbyte orhigher. Some digital audio playersmay be compatible as well.

Some USB flash memory devices(such as devices with security lock-out features, etc.) will not work inthis audio unit.

Do not use a device such as a cardreader or hard drive as the deviceor your files may be damaged.

Do not connect your USB flashmemory device using a hub.

Do not use an extension cable tothe USB adapter cable equippedwith your vehicle.

Do not keep a USB flash memorydevice in the vehicle. Directsunlight and high heat will damageit.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing a USB flashmemory device.

Depending on the type andnumber of files, it may take sometime before they begin to play.

Depending on the software thefiles were made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, ordisplay some text data.

This audio system can select andplay the audio files on a USB flashmemory device with the samecontrols used for the disc player. Toplay a USB flash memory device,connect it to the USB adapter cablein the console compartment, thenpress the AUX button. The ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

The audio system reads and playsthe audio files on the USB flashmemory device in MP3, WMA orAAC formats. The USB flashmemory device limit is up to 700folders or up to 65535 files.

Only AAC format files recordedwith iTunes are playable on thisaudio unit.

:


To Play a USB Flash MemoryDevice

NOTE:

140

０８／０７／１９　０９：４４：５５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１４５　

－

－

－

－

－

－－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－－

－－


Bitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps(MPEG1)Supported standards:MPEG1 Audio Layer3MPEG2 Audio Layer3Partition: Top partition only


Maximum layers: 8

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHzBitrate:48 320/VBR kbps (Max 384)

The specifications for compatibleAAC files are:

Even if recorded in MP3, WMA orAAC format, a file with unsupportedversion cannot be played. If thesystem finds it, the audio unitdisplays UNSUPPORTED, and thenskips to the next file.

In WMA or AAC format, DRM(digital rights management) filescannot be played. If the system findsa DRM file, the audio unit displaysUNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skipsto the next file.

Supported standards:MPEG4/AAC LCMPEG2/AAC LCPartition: Top partition onlyMaximum layers: 8

Sampling frequency:8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 kHz

Maximum layers: 8Partition: Top partition only

Supported standards:WMA version 7/8/9


Bitrate:48 320 kbps

CONTINUED


Features

141

０８／０７／１９　０９：４５：１０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１４６　

＞Connect the USB flash memorydevice to the USB adapter cablecorrectly and securely.


When the USB flash memory deviceis connected, the display shows a‘‘USB CONNECTED’’ message for afew seconds. If the AUX mode isselected, a ‘‘USB LOAD’’ message isdisplayed for a few seconds.

The display shows up to 16characters of the selected data. If thetext data has more than 16characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold the DISPbutton until the next 16 charactersare shown.

Each time you press the DISP button,the display mode shows you insequence, the folder name, the filename, the artist tag, the album tag,the track tag and name off (whichturns off the text display).

When the USB flash memory deviceis connected, the USB indicator isshown in the display.

1. 2.

Connecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice

Text Data Display Function


142

USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

CABLE

０８／０７／１９　０９：４５：１８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１４７　

－

－

－

－

Use the SEEK/SKIP button while aUSB flash memory device is playingto select passages and change files.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromfile repeat to folder repeat, then tonormal play.

Press and hold the button until youhear a beep to turn off either repeatmode. Pressing either side of theSEEK/SKIP button also turns offthis feature.

Thisfeature replays all the files in theselected folder in the order they arestored. To activate folder repeat,press and release the RPT button(preset 2) repeatedly until you seeF-RPT in the display.

This featurecontinuously plays a file. To activatefile repeat, press and release theRPT button (preset 2). You will seeRPT in the display.

Each time you press andrelease the side of the SEEK/SKIP button, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nextfile. Press and release the sideof the button to skip backward to thebeginning of the current file. Press itagain to skip to the beginning of theprevious file.

Toselect a different folder, turn theTUNE knob right or left. Turn to theright to skip to the next folder, andturn to the left to skip to the previousfolder. Turning the TUNE knobmore than two clicks skips several

folders.

To move rapidly within a file, pressand hold either side ( or )of the SEEK/SKIP button.

CONTINUED

To Change or Select Files


F-RPT (Folder Repeat)

RPT (File Repeat)

SKIP

FOLDER SELECTION

Features

143

File repeat mode is shown.

RPT INDICATOR

０８／０７／１９　０９：４５：２７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１４８　

－

－

－

－Thisfeature plays the files in the selectedfolder in random order. To activatefolder random, press and release theRDM button (preset 3). You will seeF-RDM in the display.

This featureplays all the files in random order.To activate all random, press andrelease the RDM button (preset 3)repeatedly until you see RDM in thedisplay.

Each time you press and release theRDM button, the mode changesfrom folder random, to all random,then to normal play.


This featuresamples all files in the selectedfolder in the order they are stored.To activate the scan, press andrelease the SCAN button. You willsee SCAN in the display. You will geta 10 second sampling of each file inthe folder.

Thisfeature samples the first file in eachfolder in the order they are stored.To activate folder scan, press andrelease the SCAN button repeatedlyuntil you see F-SCAN in the display.You will get a 10 second sampling ofthe first file in each folder.

Press and hold the button until youhear a beep to turn off either scanmode.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom file scan, to folder scan, then tonormal play.


F-RDM (Folder Random)

RDM (All Random)

SCAN (File Scan)

F-SCAN (Folder Scan)

144

SCAN INDICATOR

File scan is selected.

０８／０７／１９　０９：４５：３４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１４９　

If you see an error message in thedisplay, see page .

You can disconnect the USB flashmemory device at any time even ifthe USB mode is selected on theaudio system. With the AUX mode,you will see a ‘‘USB NO DATA’’message in the display. Make sure tofollow the USB flash memory device’sinstructions when you remove it.

If you reconnect the same USB flashmemory device, the system willbegin playing where it left off.

To play the radio, press the AM/FMbutton. Press the CD button toswitch to the disc mode (if a disc isloaded).


146


USB Flash Memory Device ErrorMessages

To Stop Playing a USB FlashMemory Device

Disconnecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice

Features

145

０８／０７／１９　０９：４５：４１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１５０　

If you see an error message on theaudio display while playing a USBflash memory device, find thesolution in the chart to the right. Ifyou cannot clear the error message,take your vehicle to your dealer.


The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flashmemory device. There is a possibility that the files have beendamaged.Appears when the unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

146

UNPLAYABLE FILE

UNSUPPORTED

０８／０７／１９　０９：４５：４５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１５１　

In addition to the standard audiocontrols, the audio system in yourvehicle can be operated using thevoice control system. See thenavigation section in your QuickStart Guide for an overview of thissystem, and the Navigation SystemManual for complete details.

Playing the AM/FM RadioVoice Control System

Audio System (Models with navigation system)

Features

147

TUNE BAR

SOUND ICON

AM/FMBUTTON

AUDIOBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

BACKGROUNDICON

FM1 ICON

FM2 ICON

AM ICON

AUTO SELECTICON

U.S. model is shown.

０８／０７／２２　０９：２７：０３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１５２　

－

▲ ▼

▲

▼

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thepower/volume knob or the AM/FMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe power/volume knob.

Pushing the AUDIO button will alsoturn on the system.

You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Use thecontrol buttons on the left side of thescreen. The status bar appears onthe bottom of the screen each timeyou operate any of the controlbuttons. On the navigation screen,you can also see audio informationby touching the AUDIO INFO iconon the lower of the screen.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton, or touch the desired bandicon (FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, or XM2).On the FM band, STEREO will bedisplayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the side of the bar to tuneto a higher frequency, and press the

side to tune to a lowerfrequency.

Press and hold the or side ofthe TUNE bar until you hear twobeeps to change the frequencyrapidly. Release the bar when thedisplay reaches the desiredfrequency.

For information on XM radio, seepage .

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: thepreset buttons, and .

151

U.S. models only

To Play the AM/FM Radio To Select a Station

TUNE

TUNE, SEEK, SCAN,AUTO SELECT

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

148

０８／０７／１９　０９：４６：００　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１５３　

－

－

▲ ▼

－

Each preset button’s frequency isshown on the bottom of the audiodisplay.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM and twofrequencies on FM.

The seek functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press and hold the or side ofthe TUNE bar until you hear a beep,then release it.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storesix stations each.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Pick a preset button, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Preset

SEEK

SCAN


Features

149

０８／０７／１９　０９：４６：０８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１５４　

－ If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Press the AUDIO button to view theaudio control icons, then touch theAUTO SEL icon. You will see AUTOSEL flashes in the display, and thesystem goes into scan mode forseveral seconds. It stores thefrequencies of six AM, and twelveFM stations in the preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

press theAUTO SEL icon. This restores thepresets you originally set.

For information on AM/FM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.204

To turn off auto select,

AUTO SELECT


150

０８／０７／１９　０９：４６：１２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１５５　

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)

U.S. models only

Features

151

TUNE BAR

SCAN BUTTON

JOYSTICK

CATEGORYINDICATOR

AUDIO BUTTON

XM RADIOBUTTON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

PRESET BUTTONS

AM/FM BUTTON

PRESET CHANNELNUMBER

XM RADIO ICON MODE ICON

０８／０７／１９　０９：４６：１７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１５６　

－Your audio system is capable ofreceiving XM Radio anywhere in theUnited States, except Hawaii andAlaska.

XM is a registered trademark ofXM Satellite Radio , Inc.

XM Radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM Radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.When you press and hold theAUDIO button, the display alsoshows all XM information.

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,touch the MODE icon. In channelmode, you can select all of theavailable channels. In category mode,such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.,you can select all of the channelswithin that category. Each time youtouch and release the MODE icon,the display changes between thechannel mode and the categorymode.

To listen to XM Radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position. Push thepower/volume knob to turn on theaudio system, and press the XMRADIO button. Adjust the volume byturning the knob. The last channelyou listened to will show in thedisplay.

You can also change to the XMRadio while you are listening to anFM station, AM station, disc, pc card,etc., by touching the XM1 or XM2icon on the audio display.

You can also operate the radio usingthe control buttons on the left side ofthe screen. The status bar appearson the bottom of the screen eachtime you press any of the controlbuttons. On the navigation screen,you can also see the audioinformation by touching the AUDIOINFO icon on the lower of the screen.

Operating the XM Radio MODE


152

０８／０７／１９　０９：４６：２３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１５７　

－－

－

－

▼▲

To store a channel:

You can store up to 12preset channels using each presetbutton or preset icons on the screen.Each preset button or icon storesone channel from the XM1 band andone channel from the XM2 band.

Press the TUNE bar tochange channel selections. Press

for higher numbered channelsand for lower numberedchannels. In the category mode, youcan only select channels within thatcategory.

Press and holdeither side of the TUNE bar( or ) until you hear a beepto select another category.

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button ortouch the SCAN icon on the screen.The system plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want to listento, press the button or touch the iconagain.

On the audio display, you will see theselected CHANNEL (number),CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),and TITLE (music title).

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

Press the XM RADIO button.Either XM1 or XM2 will show inthe display.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune to a desiredchannel.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

Pick the preset button (icon) youwant for that channel. Press andhold the button (icon) until youhear a beep.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

PresetTUNE

CATEGORY

SCAN


Features

153

０８／０７／１９　０９：４６：３３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１５８　

▲ ▼

Touch the CHANNEL LIST icon toswitch the display to the channel listwhich shows all channels in allcategories. Select and touch adesired channel.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

You can also select a desired channelfrom the list shown on the screen.Press the AUDIO button to show theaudio control display on thenavigation screen.

Once a channel is stored, press andrelease the proper preset button(icon) to tune to it. Each presetbutton’s channel is shown on thebottom of the audio display.

To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon on thescreen.

Press the XM RADIO button againor touch the other XM icon (XM1or XM2) on the audio display.Store the next six channels usingsteps 2 and 3.

4.

5.


To Select a Channel from List

154

CHANNEL LIST ICON

０８／０７／１９　０９：４６：４２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１５９　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

CONTINUED

The signal iscurrently too weak. Move the vehicleto an area away from tall buildings,and with an unobstructed view of thesouthern horizon.

XM is loading theaudio or program information.

The channelcurrently selected is no longerbroadcasting.

The encryptioncode is being updated. Wait until theencryption code is fully updated.Channels 0 and 1 should still worknormally.

The selected channelnumber does not exist or is not partof your subscription.

There is a problemwith the XM antenna. Please consultyour dealer.

This channel has noartist or title information at this time.

To select a desired icon with thejoystick, move it in the appropriatedirection, then press ENT.

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘UPDATING’’

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’

‘‘NO INFO’’


Features

155

０８／０７／１９　０９：４６：４９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１６０　

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.


156

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

０８／０７／１９　０９：４６：５４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１６１　

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in thesatellite radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

If you decide to purchase XM Radioservice, contact XM Radio at

, or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, press the TUNE

bar until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

Large items carried on a roof rack.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM Radioreception.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, you’ll beable to listen to XM Radio broadcasts.XM Radio will continue to send anactivation signal to your vehicle forat least 12 hours from the activationrequest. If the service has not beenactivated after 36 hours, contactXM Radio.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Radio. With the ignitionswitch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON(II) position, push the power/volumeknob to turn on the audio system andpress the XM RADIO button. Avariety of music types and styles willplay.


www.xmradio.com

Receiving XM Radio Service


Features

157

０８／０７／１９　０９：４７：０４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１６２　

－

－－

－

－

－

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound. To adjust thefront/rear fader, touch the FR or RRicon.

Adjusts the bass.Adjusts the treble. To

adjust the treble and bass, touchor on each side of the

treble or bass adjustment bar. Theadjustment bar on the right lowerdisplay shows you the currentsetting.

Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.To adjust the left/right balance,touch the L or R icon.

Adjusts thestrength of sound from thesubwoofer speaker. To adjust thesound strength, touch or

on each side of the adjustmentbar.

The right upper display shows youthe current setting of the soundstrength coming from each speaker.

The SVC modecontrols the volume based on vehiclespeed. The faster you go, the louderthe audio volume becomes. As youslow down, the audio volumedecreases. Touch the appropriateicon (Low, Mid, Hi, Off) to select themode.

You can adjust the sound on thenavigation screen. To adjust thesound, push the AUDIO button, thenenter the sound grid by touching theSOUND icon on the display.

FADER

BASSTREBLE

BALANCE

SUBWOOFER

SVC (speed-sensitive volumecompensation)

Adjusting the Sound (Models with navigation system)

158

SOUND ICON

SPEAKER SETTING

BASS/TREBLE SETTING

０８／０７／１９　０９：４７：１５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１６３　

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control buttons to adjustthe illumination of the audio system(see page ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is off.

You can select the backgroundscreen to display the sound level.There are three screen modes: level(the sound level is shown with thevertical bars), spectrum analysis (thesound level appears as ripples ofwater), and off. Each time you touchthe background icon, the displaychanges.

You can also select the icon with thejoystick. Move it up and down tomove the highlighting and scrollthrough lists. Select the icon, thenmove the joystick to left or right tochange the setting.

This function is set to MID as thedefault setting when the vehicleleaves the factory. If you feel thesound is too loud, choose low. If youfeel the sound is too quiet, choose Hi.

The system will return to the audiodisplay about 10 seconds after youstop adjusting a mode.

75

Audio System LightingScreen Mode

Adjusting the Sound (Models with navigation system)

Features

159

０８／０７／１９　０９：４７：２１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１６４　

－

＋

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

160

SCAN BUTTON

JOYSTICK

AUDIO BUTTON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

OPEN BUTTON

CD BUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON REWIND BUTTON

FAST FORWARDBUTTON

SKIP BUTTON

SKIP BUTTON

TUNE BAR

CD ICON

０８／０７／１９　０９：４７：２６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１６５　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

You operate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio. Toload or play discs, the ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position.

Video CDs and DVDs do not work inthis unit.


This audio system can also play CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in MP3or WMA formats. When playing adisc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ onthe screen. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’will appear on the screen. You canselect up to 99 folders and play up to999 tracks. If the disc has a complexstructure, it takes a while to read thedisc before the system begins to playit.

If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc isprotected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audio unitdisplays CD FORMAT, and thenskips to the next file.

Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

Compatible with variable bitrateand multi-session




Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHzBitrate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbpsSampling frequency:

32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)

CONTINUED

To Play a Disc


Features

161

NOTE:


０８／０７／１９　０９：４７：３８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１６６　

The disc player is behind thenavigation screen. To use the discplayer, press the OPEN buttonbeside the screen. The screen foldsback, and the disc player appears.

Insert a disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way and begin toplay it.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button onthe edge of the screen panel. Do notuse the folded screen as a tray. Ifyou put a cup, for example, on thescreen, the liquid inside the cup mayspill on the screen when you go overa bump.

To Load a Disc


162

OPEN BUTTON

DISC SLOT

CLOSE BUTTON

０８／０７／１９　０９：４７：４６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１６７　

－

－

Push the AUDIO button beside thescreen to show the audio display andoperate the disc player.

You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Press theCD button. The status bar appearson the bottom of the screen. On thenavigation screen, you can see theaudio information whenever youtouch the AUDIO INFO icon on thelower portion of the screen.

When playing a CD recorded withtext data, the track, album, and artistname are shown on the audio display.When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA,the folder number and name, the filenumber and name, the artist name,and the elapsed time are shown. Thesystem will continuously play a discuntil you change modes. If the discwas not recorded with text data, itwill not be displayed.

You can also select an icon with thejoystick. Move it to left, right, up, ordown to change the highlighting andscroll through lists. Then press theENT on the top of the joystick toselect the icon.

Each time you press andrelease (preset 6), the playerskips forward to the beginning of thenext track (file in MP3 or WMAmode). Press and release

(preset 5), to skip backward tothe beginning of the current track.Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.

You can use the preset buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks (files in MP3 orWMA mode). Each preset button’sfunction is shown on the bottom ofthe screen.

To move rapidly withina track/file, press and hold

(preset 4) or (preset 3).

CONTINUED

To Change or Select Tracks/Files

SKIP

FF/REW


Features

163

PRESET BUTTONS

PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION


０８／０７／１９　０９：４７：５５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１６８　

－

▲▼

－

－

－

－Toselect a different folder, press eitherside of the TUNE bar to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Pressthe side of the TUNE bar to skipto the next folder, and the side tomove to the beginning of the currentfolder. Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous folder.

To continuously replaya track (file in MP3 or WMA mode),press and release the RPT button(preset 1). You will see TRACKREPEAT in the display. Press andhold the RPT button for 2 seconds toturn it off.

This feature,when activated, replays all files inthe selected folder in the order theyare compressed. To activate folderrepeat, press and hold the RPTbutton (preset 1). You will seeFOLDER REPEAT in the display.The system continuously replays thecurrent folder. Press the RPT buttonagain to turn it off. Pressing theRDM button or selecting a differentfolder with the TUNE bar also turnsoff folder repeat.

Thisfeature plays the tracks within a disc(the files within a folder) in randomorder. To activate track random,press and release the RDM button(preset 2). You will see TRACKRANDOM in the display. Press andhold the RDM button for 2 secondsto return to normal play.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays allfiles in each folder in random order,rather than in the order they arecompressed. To activate folderrandom, press the RDM button(preset 2) twice. You will seeFOLDER RANDOM in the display.The system then selects and playsfiles randomly. This continues untilyou deactivate folder random bypressing the RDM button again, or ifyou select a different folder with theTUNE bar.

In MP3 or WMA modeIn MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA modeFOLDER SELECTION

TRACK REPEAT (FILEREPEAT)

FOLDER REPEAT

TRACK RANDOM (Randomwithin a disc/folder)

FOLDER RANDOM


164

０８／０７／１９　０９：４８：０２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１６９　

－－

CONTINUED

Pressing either SKIP button (preset5 or 6) also turns off scan.

The scan function samples all tracks(files in MP3 or WMA) in the orderthey were recorded. To activate scan,press and release the SCAN button.You will see TRACK SCAN in thedisplay. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each track/file on thedisc. Press and hold the SCANbutton for 2 seconds to get out ofscan mode and play the last track/file sampled.

This feature,when activated, samples all the firstfiles in each folder on the disc inorder. To activate folder scan, pressand hold the SCAN button. You willsee FOLDER SCAN in the display.

The system plays the first file ineach folder for about 10 seconds. Ifyou do nothing, the system thenplays the first file in each folder for10 seconds each. After playing thefirst file of the last folder, the systemgoes to normal play.

Pressing either SKIP button (preset5 or 6), or selecting a different folderwith the TUNE bar, or pressing theSCAN button, also turns off folderscan.

You can also select a track/filedirectly from the folder and file listson the audio display. Press theAUDIO button to show the audiodisplay.

In MP3 or WMA mode Using a Track ListSCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)FOLDER SCAN


Features

165

CD ICON

TRACK LIST ICON

０８／０７／１９　０９：４８：１０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１７０　

▲ ▼

Touch the Track List icon to switchthe display to the folder list, thenselect and touch a desired folder.

The display changes to the file list.Then, select and touch a desired file.

Touch the folder icon on the upperleft of the screen to move to theparent folder.

To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon on thescreen.


Press the AUDIO button to go backto the normal audio playing display.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen, andpressing the MAP button cancels theaudio control display on the screen.


166

FOLDER ICON

RETURN ICON

FOLDER ICON

RETURN ICON

TRACK/FILE ICONFOLDER ICON

０８／０７／１９　０９：４８：１８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１７１　

To remove a disc from the audio unit,fold back the screen by pressing theOPEN button (see page ). Pressthe disc eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadit after 10 seconds and put it in pausemode. To begin playing, press theCD button.

To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button.

You cannot close the screen if a discis partially inserted into its slot.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM/FM button ortouch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, orXM2 icon. If a PC card is in the audiounit, touch the CARD icon to playthe PC card. Press the CD buttonagain or touch the CD icon to switchback to the disc player.

When playing a CD recorded withtext data, each track name is shownon the audio display. With a discrecorded in MP3 or WMA, the foldernumber is also displayed.

If the disc was not recorded with textdata, only the track number is shown.

To play an audio unit connected tothe auxiliary input jack or the USBadapter cable when a disc is playing,touch the AUX or USB icon.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the disc willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the disc will beginplaying where it left off.

142

Removing a DiscTo Stop Playing a Disc


Features

167

０８／０７／１９　０９：４８：２６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１７２　

▲▼

Load the desired discs in themagazine, and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.

If you select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will searchfor the next available disc to load andplay.

For information on how to handleand protect discs, see page .An optional six or eight disc changer

is available for your vehicle. Thisdisc changer uses the same controlsused for the in-dash disc player orthe radio.

To select the disc changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different disc, use either side of theTUNE bar. To select the previousdisc, press the side. To select thenext disc, press the side.

206

Operating the Optional DiscChanger

Protecting Discs


168

０８／０７／１９　０９：４８：３２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１７３　

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.

If there is still a problem, the errormessage will appear again. Press theeject button, and pull out the disc.


ErrorMessage

Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

TOC Error

High Temperature

Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check if it is inserted correctly in the discplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.For more information, see page 207.Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.For more information, see page 207.If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your dealer.Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

Disc Player Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

Features

169

０８／０７／１９　０９：４８：４０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１７４　

－

＋

Playing a PC Card (Models with navigation system)

170

OPEN BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON SKIP BUTTON

SKIP BUTTONRANDOMBUTTON

FAST FORWARDBUTTON

REWIND BUTTON

CD/XM BUTTON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

JOYSTICK

TUNE BAR

PLAY MODEICON

PC CARD ICONTRACK LIST ICON

０８／０７／１９　０９：４８：４４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１７５　

－

－

－

－

You operate the PC card player withthe same controls used for the radioand the disc player. To load or play acard, the ignition switch must be inthe ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position.

The PC card player reads and playscards in MP3 or WMA formats.Depending on the format, the screenwill indicate ‘‘MP3’’ or ‘‘WMA’’ whena card is playing. The card limit ofthe player is 99 folders and 999tracks. If the card has a complexstructure, it takes some time for thesystem to begin playing it.

Based on PCMCIA 2.1/JEIDA 4.2,the recommended PC cards for thePC card reader are:

Always use the recommendedmemory card with the appropriateadapter (if an adapter is needed).Some memory cards will not work inthis unit.

When you insert a PC card intothe slot, make sure you put it instraight. If you cannot insert it,remove it, and insert again.

Do not keep PC cards in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage them.

To avoid damaging the cardreader, do not insert hard discdrive cards into the PC card slot.

You cannot close the screen(move it to the upright position)until the PC card is inserted all theway into its slot or removed.

Never insert foreign objects intothe PC card slot.



SD memory card

CompactFlashFlash ATA



CONTINUED

To Play a PC Card


Features

171

NOTE:

０８／０７／１９　０９：４８：５６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１７６　

－

－

－

－Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

In WMA format, DRM (digital rightsmanagement) files cannot be played.If the system finds a DRM file, itskips that file and plays the nextavailable folder or file.

The PC card slot is behind thenavigation screen. To use the PCcard player, press the OPEN buttonbeside the screen. The screen foldsback, and the PC card slot appears.

Insert a PC card straight into the slot.The drive will read the PC card andbegin to play it.

Return the screen to the uprightposition by pressing the CLOSEbutton on the edge of the screenpanel.

Push the AUDIO button beside thescreen to show the audio display andoperate the PC card player.

You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Press anyof the appropriate control buttons.The status bar appears on thebottom of the screen. On thenavigation screen, you can see theaudio information whenever youtouch the AUDIO INFO icon on thescreen.


Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHzBitrate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbpsCompatible with variable bitrateand multi-session

Loading a PC Card


172

PC CARD SLOT

０８／０７／１９　０９：４９：０６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１７７　

Artist mode plays tracks inalphabetical order, by artist andsong title.

There are three play modes: Folder,Artist, and Album. Touch the PLAYMODE icon, then choose one of themodes by touching its icon. When amode is selected, it is highlighted inblue.

Folder mode plays tracks in theorder they were added to the card.

Album mode plays albums(folders) in alphabetical order.

If play mode information was notincluded in the tracks when theywere added to the card, it will not bedisplayed on the screen.

To select a play mode, push theAUDIO button to show the audiodisplay, then touch the PLAY MODEicon on the display.

CONTINUED

To Select a Play Mode


Features

173

MODE INDICATOR

PLAY MODE ICON

PLAY MODE ICON PLAY MODE ICON

MODE INDICATOR MODE INDICATOR

FOLDER MODE

ARTIST MODE ALBUM MODE

０８／０７／１９　０９：４９：１７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１７８　

If you select ‘‘Play a New Track List,’’the system goes into the selectedplay mode immediately and begins toplay the files in order to the new list.

To go back to the previous screen,press the CANCEL button on theright side of the screen. To exit theplay mode screens, press the AUDIObutton.

Select the desired mode by touchingthe appropriate icon, or move thejoystick, then press the ENT.

After you select the play mode, thedisplay changes to the selectableplaying menu. If you select‘‘Continue playing the Current Song,’’the system goes into the selectedplay mode after playing the currentfile.


174

０８／０７／１９　０９：４９：２３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１７９　

－

－

－

▲▼

－

－

Icons on the screen can also beselected with the joystick. Move thejoystick left or right and up or downuntil the icon is highlighted, thenpress the ENT on the top of thejoystick to select the icon.

You can use the preset buttons whilea card is playing to select or changefiles. Each preset button’s function isshown on the bottom of the screen.

Each time you press andrelease (preset 6), the playerskips forward to the beginning of thenext file. Press and release

(preset 5), to skip backward tothe beginning of the current file.Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous file.

To move rapidly withina file, press and hold (preset 4)or (preset 3).

Toselect a different folder, press eitherside of the TUNE bar to move thebeginning of the next folder. Pressthe side of the TUNE bar to skipthe next folder, and to the side tomove the beginning of the currentfolder. Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous folder.

To continuously replaya file, press and release the RPTbutton (preset 1). You will seeTRACK REPEAT in the display.Press the RPT button again to turn itoff.

This feature, whenactivated, replays all the files in theselected folder/artist/album in theorder they are recorded or listed. Toactivate each repeat mode, press andhold the RPT button (preset 1) for 2seconds. You will see FOLDERREPEAT, ARTIST REPEAT orALBUM REPEAT in the display.The system continuously replays thecurrent folder/artist/album. Pressand hold the RPT button for 2seconds again to turn it off. Pressingthe RDM button, or selecting adifferent folder/artist/album withthe TUNE bar also turns off therepeat feature.

To Change or Select Tracks/Files SKIP

FF/REW

FOLDER SELECTION

TRACK REPEAT (FILEREPEAT)

FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUMREPEAT


Features

175

PRESET BUTTONS

PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION


０８／０７／１９　０９：４９：３２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１８０　

－

－

－

－This featureplays the files within a folder inrandom order. To activate trackrandom, press and release the RDMbutton (preset 2). You will seeTRACK RANDOM in the display.Press and hold the RDM button for 2seconds to return to normal play.

This feature, whenactivated, plays all files in eachfolder/artist/album in random order,rather than in the order they arerecorded or listed. To activate eachrandom play, press the RDM button(preset 2) 2 times. You will seeFOLDER RANDOM, ARTISTRANDOM or ALBUM RANDOM inthe display.

The system then selects and playsfiles randomly. This continues untilyou deactivate each random play bypressing the RDM button again, oryou select a different folder/artist/album with the TUNE bar.

The scan function samplesall files on the PC card in the orderthey are recorded. To activate scan,press and release the SCAN button.You will see TRACK SCAN in thedisplay. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each file on the PC card.Press and hold the SCAN button for2 seconds to get out of scan modeand play the last file sampled.

Pressing either of the SKIP buttons(preset 5 or 6) also turns off the scanfeature.

This feature, whenactivated, samples the first file ineach folder/artist/album on the PCcard in order. To activate each scanfeature, press and hold the SCANbutton until you hear a beep. You willsee FOLDER SCAN, ARTIST SCANor ALBUM SCAN in the display.

The system plays the first file in thefolder for about 10 seconds. If you donothing, the system plays the firstfile in each folder, in order, for 10seconds each. After playing the firstfile of the last folder/artist/album,the system returns to normal play.

Pressing either of the SKIP buttons(preset 5 or 6), selecting a differentfolder/artist/album with the TUNEbar, or pressing the SCAN button,also turns off the scan feature.

TRACK RANDOM (Randomwithin a folder)

FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUMRANDOM

SCAN

FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUMSCAN


176

０８／０７／１９　０９：４９：３９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１８１　

▲ ▼To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon.

You can also select a file directlyfrom the folder and track lists on theaudio display. Press the AUDIObutton to show the audio display,then touch the Track List icon. Thefolder list menu appears on thedisplay.

To select a folder, touch its icon onthe screen. The display changes tothe file list. Then, select and touch adesired file. In folder mode, touchthe folder icon on the upper left ofthe screen to move to the parentfolder.The current folder is highlighted inblue.

CONTINUED

Using a Track List


Features

177

RETURN ICON

FOLDER ICON

TRACK LIST ICON

０８／０７／１９　０９：４９：４７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１８２　

In artist mode, the artist name is alsodisplayed on the right side of eachselectable icon. Select the desiredfile.


Press the AUDIO button to go backto the normal audio playing display.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen, andpressing the MAP button cancels theaudio control display on the screen.

In album mode, the album name isalso displayed on the right side ofeach selectable icon. Select thedesired file.


178

ARTIST NAME ALBUM NAME

０８／０７／１９　０９：４９：５４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１８３　

CONTINUED

When you select ‘‘Song Search’’ fromthe track list display, the song searchmenu appears.

You can then select any of threemodes to search a file: Title byKeyword, Artist, and Album.

In Title by Keyword mode, enter thetitle name, or any keyword, bytouching the letter icons on thescreen. Touch the List icon to beginthe song search. If you press theCANCEL button on the screen, thedisplay returns to the mode menuwithout doing a search.

Searching for a Song Title by KeywordSong Search Function


Features

179

ARTIST ICON

TITLE BY KEYWORD ICON

RETURN ICON

SONG SEARCH ICON

ALBUM ICONFolder mode is shown.

MORE ICON

DELETE ICON LIST ICON

０８／０７／１９　０９：５０：０３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１８４　

▲ ▼

To cancel the selected letter, selectthe letter and touch the Delete icon.To select more characters, touch theMore icon. The other character listwill be shown.

After the system searches for a song,a file list is displayed. To scrollthrough the list, touch the oricon on the side of the screen. Selectthe desired file by touching theappropriate icon, or moving thejoystick and pressing the ENT.

Select the Artist icon, and the artistlist appears. Select the desired artist,and the artist’s file list is displayed.

Select the Album icon, and thealbum list appears. Select the desiredalbum, and its song list is displayed.You can then select the desired songfrom the list.

Searching for a Song by Artist Name Searching for a Song by Album Name


180

FILE LIST

ARTIST LIST ALBUM LIST

０８／０７／１９　０９：５０：１１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１８５　

＊

＊

＊

To play the radio when a PC card isplaying, press the AM/FM button ortouch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1 , orXM2 icon. If a disc is in the audiounit, press the CD button or touchthe CD icon to play the disc. Touchthe CARD icon to switch back to thePC card player.

To play an audio unit connected tothe auxiliary input jack or the USBadapter cable when a PC card isplaying, touch the AUX or USB icon.

If you turn the system off while a PCcard is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the card willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the card will beginplaying where it left off.

When you leave the vehicle, alwaysremove the PC card from the audiounit.

To remove a PC card from the audiounit, fold back the screen bypressing the OPEN button (see page

). Press the eject button ( )to remove the card. If you do notremove it from the slot, you cannotreturn the screen to the uprightposition.

To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button.

You can also eject a card when theignition switch is off.

If there is a problem with the PCcard player, see your dealer.

U.S. models only:

162


To Stop Playing a PC Card PC Card Player Malfunction

Removing a PC Card

Features

181

０８／０７／１９　０９：５０：２０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１８６　

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a PC card, findthe solution in the chart to the right.If you cannot clear the errormessage, take your vehicle to yourdealer.

SolutionIndication

The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the disc. Thereis a possibility that the files have been damaged.It appears when the PC card is empty or there are no MP3 or WMAfiles in the PC card. Save the MP3 or WMA files in the PC card.It appears when the unsupported PC card is inserted. The systemsupports CF card, Flash ATA card, and SanDisk 6-in-1 Card Adapter.

PC Card Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

182

FILE ERROR

NO MUSIC

MEDIA ERROR

０８／０７／１９　０９：５０：２４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１８７　

－

＋

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)

Features

183

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

MAP BUTTON

iPod INDICATOR

CD/XM BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

USB ICON

AUDIO DISPLAY

RPT (REPEAT)BUTTON

RDM (RANDOM)BUTTON

FAST FORWARDBUTTON

SKIP BUTTON

SKIP BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON


JOYSTICK

REWIND BUTTON

０８／０７／１９　０９：５０：２８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１８８　

＊

＊

iPods that are compatible with youraudio system are listed below.

Use the latest firmware.

This audio system can select andplay the audio files on the iPod withthe same controls used for the in-dash disc player. To play an iPod,connect it to the USB adapter cablein the console compartment by usingyour dock connector. Press theAUDIO button beside the screen toshow the audio display and touch theAUX icon. The ignition switch mustbe in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position. The iPod will also berecharged with the ignition switch inthese positions.

You can also select an icon bymoving the joystick. Move it to left,right, up, or down to change thehighlighting and scroll through lists,then press ENT on the top of thejoystick to set your selection.

To select the USB mode withoutusing the icon, press the CD/XMbutton repeatedly. The status barappears on the bottom of the screen.

The audio system reads and playssound files to be playable on the iPod.The system cannot operate an iPodas a mass storage device. Thesystem will only play songs stored onthe iPod with iTunes.

iPod and iTunes are registeredtrademarks owned by Apple Inc.

You can select the AUX mode byusing the navigation system voicecontrol buttons, but cannot operatethe play mode functions.

Use only compatible iPods with thelatest firmware. iPods that are notcompatible will not work in this audiounit.

:

FirmwareVer. 1.2 or moreVer. 1.0 or moreVer. 1.2 or moreVer. 1.1.2 or more

Ver. 1.0 or more

Ver. 1.1.1 or moreVer. 1.1.1 or more

ModeliPod 5GiPod classiciPod nanoiPod nano2nd generationiPod nano3rd generationiPod touchiPhone

To Play an iPod


Voice Control System

184

０８／０７／１９　０９：５０：３７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１８９　

Do not connect your iPod using ahub.

Do not keep the iPod in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage it.

Do not use an extension cablebetween the USB adapter cableequipped with your vehicle andyour dock connector.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing it.

In AAC format, DRM (digital rightsmanagement) files cannot be played.If the system finds a DRM file, theaudio unit displays UNPLAYABLE,and then skips to the next file.

Install the dock connector to theUSB adapter cable securely.

Connect your dock connector tothe iPod correctly and securely.


1. 2.

3.

CONTINUED

NOTE: Connecting an iPod


Features

185

DOCK CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTERCABLE

CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

０８／０７／１９　０９：５０：４７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１９０　

＊

＊

When the iPod is connected and theUSB mode is selected on the audiodisplay, ‘‘LOAD’’ is shown for a fewseconds, then the iPod indicator isshown on the display. On thenavigation map display, the ‘‘USBCONNECTED’’ message will bedisplayed for a few seconds in thelower part of the screen. Afterloading, you will see Honda markon the iPod. That means you canonly operate your iPod with the

vehicle’s audio unit.

If the audio system still does notrecognize the iPod, the iPod mayneed to be reset. Follow theinstructions that came with youriPod, or you can find resetinstructions online at

If the iPod indicator does not appearin the audio display, check theconnections, and try to reconnect theiPod a few times.

It may take a few minutes forthe Honda mark to display onthe iPod. If the display does notchange, this function is notsupported on your iPod modelor firmware.

When the iPod is connected and theaudio display is selected on thescreen by pressing the AUDIObutton, the AUX icon switches to the

USB icon. The display also showsthe current file number and total ofthe selected playable files, the artist,album and track (file) names on thenavigation screen.

On the map screen, you can see theaudio information whenever youtouch the AUDIO INFO icon on thelower part of the screen.

:

www.apple.com/ipod.


186

Sample Display

OK to disconnect.

AUDIO INFO ICON

０８／０７／１９　０９：５０：５４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１９１　

－

－

CONTINUED

Use the preset buttons while an iPodis playing to select passages andchange files. Each preset button’sfunction is shown on the bottom ofthe screen.




You can also select a file directlyfrom a track list on the audio display.Press the AUDIO button to show theaudio display, then touch the TrackList icon. The track list menuappears on the display.


To Change or Select Files Using a Track ListSKIP

FF/REW

Features

187

PRESET BUTTONS

AUDIO DISPLAY

TRACK LIST ICON

U.S. model is shown. U.S. model is shown.

０８／０７／１９　０９：５１：０３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１９２　

▲ ▼

You can also select a file from theiPod menu: playlists, artists, albumsand songs. Press the AUDIO buttonto display the audio display on thenavigation screen. Touch the iPodMENU icon to display the iPod menu.

To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon.


Select a desired list by touching theappropriate icon.


To Select a File from iPod Menu

188


iPod MENU ICON

０８／０７／１９　０９：５１：１０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１９３　

▲ ▼

CONTINUED

The display shows the items on thatlist. Touch a desired file.



If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on either theartists or albums list, all availablefiles on the selected list are played.

You can select any type of repeat andrandom modes with the RPT andRDM buttons. To confirm theselected mode, press the AUDIObutton to show the audio display onthe navigation screen.

Press the AUDIO button to go backto the normal audio playing display.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen, andpressing the MAP button cancels theaudio display on the screen.


To Select Repeat or Random Mode:

Features

189

０８／０７／１９　０９：５１：１８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１９４　

－

－

－

This featurecontinuously plays a track/file. Toactivate track repeat, press andrelease the RPT button (preset 1).You will see REPEAT in the display.To turn it off, press and release theRPT button again.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changesbetween track repeat and normalplay.

Pressing either SKIP button changesthe file while keeping this feature.

This featureplays all available tracks/files fromthe selected items in the iPod menulist (playlists, artists, albums orsongs) in random order. To activatetrack random, press and release theRDM button (preset 2). You will seeTRACK RANDOM on the screen.

This featureplays all available albums from theselected items in the iPod menu list(playlists, artists, albums or songs)in random order. The files in eachalbum are played in the recordedorder. To activate the album randomfeature, press and hold the RDMbutton (Preset 2). You will see‘‘ALBUM RANDOM’’ in the display.To turn it off, press and hold theRDM button (Preset 2).

You can also select another list fromthe iPod menu while keeping therandom function.

Available operating functions vary onmodels or versions. Some functionsmay not be available on the vehicle’saudio system.


TRACK REPEAT

TRACK RANDOM

ALBUM RANDOM

NOTE:

190



０８／０７／１９　０９：５１：２７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１９５　

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

To play the radio, press the AM/FMbutton or touch the FM1, FM2, AM,XM1 , or XM2 icon. Press the CDicon to switch to the disc mode (if adisc is loaded). Each time you pressthe CD/XM button, the audio modeswitches between iPod, disc andXM radio .

U.S. models only

If a PC card is in the audio unit,touch the CARD icon to play the PCcard.

You can disconnect the iPod at anytime when you see the ‘‘OK todisconnect’’ message in the iPoddisplay. Always make sure you seethe ‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message inthe iPod display before youdisconnect it. Make sure to followthe iPod’s instructions on how todisconnect the dock connector fromthe USB adapter cable.

The displayed message mayvary on models or versions. Onsome models, there is nomessage to disconnect.

When you disconnect the iPod whileit is playing, the audio screen (ifselected) shows NO DATA.

If you reconnect the same iPod, thesystem may begin playing where itleft off, depending on what mode theiPod is in when it is reconnected.

If you see an error message in thescreen, see page .

:

:

192


To Stop Playing Your iPod iPod Error MessagesDisconnecting an iPod

Features

191

０８／０７／１９　０９：５１：３６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１９６　

If you see an error message on thescreen while playing an iPod, findthe solution in the chart to the right.If you cannot clear the errormessage, take your vehicle to yourdealer.

Error Message Solution

Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.There is no music information.

iPod Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

192

UNSUPPORTEDNO SONG

０８／０７／１９　０９：５１：４０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１９７　

－

＋

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

Features

193

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

AUDIO BUTTON

USB ICON

RPT (REPEAT)BUTTON

RDM (RANDOM)BUTTON

FAST FORWARDBUTTON

SKIP BUTTON

SKIP BUTTON

MP3 INDICATOR

SCAN BUTTON

TRACK LISTICON

SOUND ICON

REWIND BUTTON TUNE BAR

JOYSTICK

TUNE BAR

U. S. model is shown.

０８／０７／１９　０９：５１：４５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１９８　

＊

＊You can also select an icon bymoving the joystick. Move it to left,right, up, or down to change thehighlighting and scroll through lists,then press ENT on the top of thejoystick to set your selection.

The recommended USB flashmemory devices are 256 Mbyte orhigher. Some digital audio playersmay be compatible as well.

Some USB flash memory devices(such as devices with security lock-out features, etc.) will not work inthis audio unit.

The audio system reads and playsthe audio files on the USB flashmemory device in MP3, WMA orAAC formats. Depending on theformat, the display shows MP3,WMA or AAC when a USB flashmemory device is playing. The USBflash memory device limit is up to700 folders or up to 65535 files.

To select the USB mode withoutusing the icon, press the CD/XMbutton repeatedly. The status barappears on the bottom of the screen.

Only AAC format files recordedwith iTunes are playable on thisaudio unit.

This audio system can select andplay the audio files from a USB flashmemory device with the samecontrols used for the in-dash discplayer. To play a USB flash memorydevice, connect it to the USB adaptercable in the console compartment.The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Press the AUDIO button beside thescreen to show the audio display andtouch the AUX icon.

:


To Play a USB Flash MemoryDevice

194

０８／０７／１９　０９：５１：５２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０１９９　

－

－

－－

－

CONTINUED

Bitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps(MPEG1)


Do not use a device such as a cardreader or hard drive as the deviceor your files may be damaged.

Do not connect your USB flashmemory device using a hub.

Do not use an extension cable tothe USB adapter cable equippedwith your vehicle.

Do not keep a USB flash memorydevice in the vehicle. Directsunlight and high heat will damageit.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing a USB flashmemory device.

Depending on the type andnumber of files, it may take sometime before they begin to play.

Depending on the software thefiles were made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, ordisplay some text data.


You can select the AUX mode byusing the navigation system voicecontrol buttons, but cannot operatethe play mode functions. Maximum layers: 8

Partition: Top partition only

Supported standards:MPEG1 Audio Layer3MPEG2 Audio Layer3


NOTE:

Voice Control System

Features

195

０８／０７／１９　０９：５２：０４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２００　

－

－

－

－

－

－－

－

－

－

－－


Bitrate:48 320/VBR kbps (Max 384)

Partition: Top partition onlyMaximum layers: 8

Bitrate:48 320 kbpsSupported standards:MPEG4/AAC LCMPEG2/AAC LCPartition: Top partition onlyMaximum layers: 8


The specifications for compatibleAAC files are:

Even if recorded in MP3, WMA orAAC format, a file with anunsupported version cannot beplayed. If the system finds anunsupported file, the screen displaysUNSUPPORTED, and then skips tothe next file.

In WMA or AAC format, DRM(digital rights management) filescannot be played. If the system findsa DRM file, the screen displaysUNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skipsto the next file.

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz

Supported standards:WMA version 7/8/9

Sampling frequency:8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 kHz 1.


Connecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice

196

CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

０８／０７／１９　０９：５２：１６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２０１　

Connect the USB flash memorydevice to the USB adapter cablecorrectly and securely.

When the USB device is connectedand the audio display is selected onthe screen by pressing the AUDIObutton, the AUX icon switches to theUSB icon. The display also showsthe folder and file numbers, and theelapsed time.

On the map screen, you can see theaudio information whenever youtouch the AUDIO INFO icon on thelower part of the screen.

Use the preset buttons while a USBflash memory device is playing toselect passages and change files.Each preset button’s function isshown on the bottom of the screen.

2.

CONTINUED


To Change or Select Files

Features

197

USB ADAPTER CABLEAUDIO INFO ICON

PRESET BUTTONS


０８／０７／１９　０９：５２：２５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２０２　

－

－

－

▲▼




Toselect a different folder, press eitherside of the TUNE bar. Press the

side to skip to the next folder,and press the side to skip to thebeginning of the previous folder.

You can also select a folder and filefrom the lists shown on the screen.Press the AUDIO button to show theaudio display on the navigationscreen.


SKIP

FF/REW

FOLDER SELECTION To Select a File from Folder and FileLists

198

TRACK LIST ICON


０８／０７／１９　０９：５２：３１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２０３　

▲ ▼

CONTINUED

Touch the Track List icon to switchthe display to the folder list, thenselect and touch a desired folder.

The display changes to the file list.Then, select and touch a desired file.

Touch the folder icon on the upperleft of the screen to move to theparent folder.



Press the AUDIO button to go backto the normal audio playing display.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen, andpressing the MAP button cancels theaudio display on the screen.


Features

199

FOLDER ICON FOLDER ICON

０８／０７／１９　０９：５２：４０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２０４　

－

－

You can select any type of repeat,random and scan modes with theRPT, RDM and SCAN buttons. Toconfirm the selected mode, press theAUDIO button to show the audiocontrol display on the navigationscreen.

This featurereplays all the tracks/files in theselected folder in the order they arestored. To activate folder repeat,press and hold the RPT button(preset 1) until you see FOLDERREPEAT in the display.

Press and hold the button until youhear a beep to turn off either repeatmode. Pressing either side of theTUNE bar also turns off this feature.

This featurecontinuously plays a track/file. Toactivate track repeat, press andrelease the RPT button (preset 1).You will see TRACK REPEAT in thedisplay.


To Select Repeat, Random or ScanMode:

FOLDER REPEAT

TRACK REPEAT

200


０８／０７／１９　０９：５２：４６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２０５　

－

－

－

－

This featureplays all the tracks/files in randomorder. To activate track random,press and release the RDM button(preset 2). You will see TRACKRANDOM in the display.

Thisfeature plays the tracks/files in theselected folder in random order. Toactivate folder random, press andhold the RDM button (preset 2) untilyou see FOLDER RANDOM in thedisplay.

This featuresamples all tracks/files in theselected folder in the order they arestored. To activate track scan, pressand release the SCAN button. Youwill see TRACK SCAN in the display.You will get a 10 second sampling ofeach track/file in the folder.

This featuresamples the first track/file in eachfolder in the order they are stored.To activate folder scan, press andhold the SCAN button until you seeFOLDER SCAN in the display. Youwill get a 10 second sampling of eachfirst track/file in the folder(s).

Press and hold the button until youhear a beep to turn off either scanmode. Pressing either SKIP buttonalso turns off this feature.



TRACK RANDOM

FOLDER RANDOM

TRACK SCAN

FOLDER-SCAN

Features

201

０８／０７／１９　０９：５２：５２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２０６　

＊＊

＊

＊

To play the radio, press the AM/FMbutton or touch the FM1, FM2, AM,XM1 , or XM2 icon. Press the CDicon to switch to the disc mode (if adisc is loaded). Each time you pressthe CD/XM button, the audio modeswitches between the USB, disc andXM radio .

If a PC card is in the audio unit,touch the CARD icon to play the PCcard.

You can disconnect the USB flashmemory device at any time even ifthe USB mode is selected on theaudio system. Make sure to followthe USB flash memory device’sinstructions when you remove it.

When you disconnect the USB flashmemory device while it is playing,the audio display (if selected) showsNO DATA.


If you see an error message in thescreen, see page .

U.S. models only:

203


To Stop Playing a USB FlashMemory Device

USB Flash Memory Device ErrorMessages

Disconnecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice

202

０８／０７／１９　０９：５２：５９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２０７　

If you see an error message on thescreen while playing a USB flashmemory device, find the solution inthe chart to the right. If you cannotclear the error message, take yourvehicle to your dealer.


The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flashmemory device. There is a possibility that the files have been damaged.Appears when the unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.There is no music information.

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

Features

203

UNPLAYABLE FILE

UNSUPPORTEDNO SONG

０８／０７／１９　０９：５３：０３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２０８　

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

AM/FM Radio Reception

204

０８／０７／１９　０９：５３：１２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２０９　

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.


AM/FM Radio Reception

Features

205

０８／０７／１９　０９：５３：１８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２１０　

When a disc is not being played,store it in its case to protect it fromdust and other contamination. Toprevent warpage, keep discs out ofdirect sunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

A new disc may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on therecording surface of the disc,causing skipping or other problems.Remove these pieces by rubbing theinner and outer edges with the sideof a pencil or pen.

Handle a disc by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the disc.These, along with contaminationfrom finger prints, liquids, and felt-tip pens, can cause the disc to notplay properly, or possibly jam in thedrive.

When recording a CD-R orCD-RW, the recording must beclosed for it to be used by thesystem.

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,use only high quality discs labeledfor audio use.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe disc player.

Handle your discs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

Play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped discs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

General Information Protecting Discs

Protecting Your Discs

206


０８／０７／１９　０９：５３：２７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２１１　

The in-dash disc player/changer hasa sophisticated and delicatemechanism. If you insert a damageddisc as indicated in this section, itmay become stuck inside anddamage the audio unit.

Examples of these discs are shownto the right:

Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs

Damaged discs Poor quality discs

1.

2. 3.

CONTINUED

Additional Information onRecommended Discs


Features

207

Sealed

Warped BurrsChipped/Cracked

With Label/Sticker

With PlasticRing

Using PrinterLabel Kit

Bubbled/Wrinkled

０８／０７／１９　０９：５３：３８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２１２　

Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs

CD-R or CD-RW may not play dueto the recording conditions.

Scratches and fingerprints on thediscs may cause the sound to skip.

Recommended discs are printedwith the following logo.

Audio unit may not play thefollowing formats.

4. 5.


208

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Arrow ShapeCan Shape

０８／０７／１９　０９：５３：４９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２１３　

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from a dealer. Todo this, you will need the system’sserial number.

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code(except for model with navigationsystem)/four-digit code (model withnavigation system) in the presetbuttons. Because there are hundredsof number combinations possiblefrom five or four-digits, making thesystem work without knowing theexact code is nearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s code andserial numbers. It is best to store thiscard in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit (except for model withnavigation system)/four-digit (modelwith navigation system) sequence,then enter the correct code. Youhave 10 tries to enter the correctcode. If you are unsuccessful in 10attempts, you must then leave thesystem on for 1 hour before tryingagain.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or theradio fuse is removed, the audiosystem will disable itself. Use thepreset buttons to enter the five-digitcode (except for model withnavigation system)/four-digit code(model with navigation system). Thecode is on the radio code cardincluded in your owner’s manual kit.When it is entered correctly, theradio will start playing.

Radio Theft Protection

Features

209

０８／０７／１９　０９：５３：５４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２１４　

▲ ▼ ＋－

＋

－

＋

－

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button, hold it untilthe desired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,disc (if a disc is loaded), or a PC card(if it is loaded). On models withsatellite radio system, you can alsoselect XM radio.

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

To activate the seek function, pressand hold the top ( ) or bottom ( )of the CH button until you hear abeep. The system searches up ordown from the current frequency tofind a station with a strong signal.

If you are playing a disc, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack (file in MP3 or WMA format)each time you press the top ( ) ofthe CH button. Press the bottom( ) to return to the beginning of thecurrent track or file. Press it twice toreturn to the previous track or file.

You will see the track/file numberand the elapsed time. If the disc hastext data or is compressed in MP3 orWMA, you can also see any otherinformation (track title, file name,folder name, etc.).

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press and release thetop ( ) of the button, the systemgoes to the next preset station on theband you are listening to. Press andrelease the bottom ( ) to go back tothe previous station.

If an iPod or a USB flash memorydevice is plugged into the system,you can also select AUX.

Remote Audio Controls

210

CH BUTTON

MODE BUTTONVOL BUTTON

０８／０７／１９　０９：５４：０２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２１５　

＋

－

＋

－

＋

－

If you are playing a PC card, pressthe top ( ) of the CH button toadvance to the next file. Press thebottom ( ) to go back to theprevious file.

In MP3 or WMA mode, you can usethe seek function to select folders.Press and hold the top ( ) of theCH button until you hear a beep, toskip forward to the first file of thenext folder. Press the bottom ( ) toskip backward to the previous folder.

The auxiliary input jack isunderneath the accessory powersocket on the front panel. Thesystem will accept auxiliary inputfrom standard audio accessories.

When playing a USB flash memorydevice, you can also use the seekfunction to skip the folder. Toactivate this, press and hold eitherside of the CH button until you heara beep.

When a compatible audio unit isconnected to the jack, press the AUXbutton (AUX icon on models withnavigation system) to select it.

If you are playing a USB flashmemory device or iPod with the USBadapter cable (if equipped), pressand release the top ( ) of the CHbutton to skip forward to thebeginning of the next file. Press thebottom ( ) to skip backward to thebeginning to the current file. Press ittwice to return to the previous file.

Remote Audio Controls, Auxiliary Input Jack

Auxiliary Input Jack

Features

211

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

０８／０７／１９　０９：５４：０９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２１６　

Change the hours by pressing the H(preset 1) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time. Changethe minutes by pressing the M(preset 2) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time.

To set the time, press the CLOCKbutton until the displayed timebegins to blink, then release thebutton.

Press the CLOCK button again toenter the set time.

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, pressing theCLOCK button until you hear a beep,then pressing the R (preset 3) buttonsets the clock back to the previoushour. If the displayed time is afterthe half hour, the clock sets forwardto the beginning of the next hour.

The navigation system receivessignals from the global positioningsystem (GPS), and the displayedtime is updated automatically by theGPS. Refer to the navigation systemmanual for how to adjust the time.

For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:001:52 will reset to 2:00

On models with navigation system

On models without navigation system

Setting the Clock

212

HOUR BUTTON RESET BUTTON

CLOCK BUTTON

MINUTE BUTTON

０８／０７／１９　０９：５４：１７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２１７　

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights (low beam), parkinglights, side marker lights, andtaillights flash if someone attemptsto break into your vehicle or removethe radio. This alarm continues for 2minutes, then it stops. To reset anactivated system before the 2minutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s door with the key or theremote transmitter.

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and trunk. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors from the outside with the key,driver’s lock tab, door lock masterswitch, or remote transmitter. Thesecurity system indicator on theinstrument panel starts blinkingimmediately to show you the systemis setting itself.

Once the security system is set,opening any door, the trunk, or thehood without using the key or theremote transmitter will cause it toalarm. It also alarms if the radio isremoved from the dashboard or thewiring is cut.

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the master keyor the remote transmitter withouttriggering the alarm. The alarm willsound if the trunk lock is forced, or

the trunk is opened with the trunkrelease handle.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or either door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and check theindicators on the instrument panel.Close either door or the trunkindicated on the display. Check thehood visually since it is not part ofthe display, and shut it if necessary.

To see if the system is setafter you exit the vehicle, press theLOCK button on the remotetransmitter within 5 seconds. If thesystem is set, the horn will beeponce.Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

Security System

Features

213

NOTE:

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

０８／０７／１９　０９：５４：２４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２１８　

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel comes on.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down. This will cancel cruisecontrol. To resume the set speed,press the RES/ACCEL button. Theindicator on the instrument panel willcome back on.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The CRUISE CONTROLindicator on the instrument panelcomes on to show the system isnow activated.

1.

2.

3.Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control

214

CANCELBUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON RES/ACCELBUTTON

SET/DECELBUTTONImproper use of the cruise

control can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

０８／０７／１９　０９：５４：３２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２１９　

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, the vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed, then press the SET/DECEL button.

Resting your foot on the brake pedalcauses cruise control to cancel.

Tap the brake pedal lightly withyour foot. The CRUISECONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control

Features

215

０８／０７／１９　０９：５４：４２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２２０　

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem will remember the previouslyset cruising speed. To return to thatspeed, accelerate to above 25 mph(40 km/h), and then press andrelease the RES/ACCEL button. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator comeson. The vehicle will accelerate to thesame cruising speed as before.

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system off and erases theprevious cruising speed.

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

Tap the brake pedal.

Canceling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed

Cruise Control

216

CRUISE BUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

０８／０７／１９　０９：５４：４８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２２１　

Your vehicle is equipped with theBluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL).HFL uses Bluetooth technology tolink your cell phone to your vehicle.With HFL, you can place and receivecalls through your vehicle’s audiosystem, without the distraction ofhandling your cell phone. To use thisfeature, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone with theHands Free Profile. For moreinformation, and a list of compatiblecell phones, visit

, or call (888) 528-7876. InCanada, visit , or call(888) 9-HONDA-9.

Here are the main features of HFL.Instructions for using HFL begin onpage .

HFL recognizes simple voicecommands, such as phone numbersand names. It uses these commandsto automatically dial, receive, andstore numbers. For moreinformation on voice control, seeUsing Voice Control on page .

The Bluetooth name and logos areregistered trademarks owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use ofsuch marks by Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. is under license. Othertrademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

Bluetooth is the wireless technologythat links your phone to HFL. HFLuses a Class 2 Bluetooth, whichmeans the maximum range betweenyour phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10meters).

To use HFL, your phone must haveapproved Bluetooth capability alongwith the Hands Free Profile. Thistype of phone is available throughmany phone makers and cellularcarriers. You can also find anapproved phone by visiting

, or by callingthe HandsFreeLink consumersupport at (888) 528-7876. In Canada,visit , or call (888) 9-HONDA-9.The HFL is available in English on

U.S. models, and in both English andFrench on Canadian models. Tochange the language, see page .The voice of HFL is set to female.

221

221

251

handsfreelink.honda.com

www.honda.cahandsfreelink.honda.com

www.honda.ca

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

On models with navigation system

Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Voice Control HFL

Features

217

０８／０７／１９　０９：５４：５７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２２２　

With a linked phone, HFL allows youto send and receive calls in yourvehicle without holding the phone.

The HFL system has a help functionto provide instructions for pairing aphone, and give hints on how tooperate HFL properly. If yourresponse or command is not correct,or the system cannot recognize acommand, the HFL system will giveyou an appropriate command or playthe help prompt.

HFL can store up to 50 names andphone numbers in its phonebook.With a linked phone, you can thenautomatically dial any name ornumber in the phonebook.

Your vehicle’s HFL system has thecellular phonebook import function.This allows you to import yourcellular phonebook to HFL. Usingthe navigation system, you can makea call directly and store a desirednumber in HFL from the list shownon the navigation display. Formore information on how to importthe phonebook, see page . Tomake a call, see page .

Your phone may not havephonebook import function. Visit

, or call theHandsFreeLink consumer supportat (888) 528-7876. In Canada, call(888) 9-HONDA-9. You can see yourphone’s owner’s manual forinformation.

The HFL microphone is on theceiling, between the spotlights. Themicrophone is shared with thenavigation system.

You can also store the desirednumber to the HFL phonebookdirectly from your cell phone usingthe receive contact function in HFL.

HFL and the navigation system haveseparate voice recognition systems.When HFL is in use, a voicecommand for the navigation systemwill not be recognized even if youpress the navigation Talk button. Inthis case, you will hear two shortbeeps, and the HFL system has noprompt.

243232



Incoming/Outgoing Calls

Help Assistance

Phonebook

Microphone

218

NOTE:

０８／０７／１９　０９：５５：０５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２２３　

The HFL buttons are used asfollows:When HFL is in use, the sound

comes through the vehicle’s frontaudio system speakers. If the audiosystem is in use while operatingeither of the HFL buttons or makinga call, HFL overrides the audiosystem. To change the volume level,use the audio system volume knob orthe steering wheel volume controls.

To operate HFL, use the HFL Talkand Back buttons on the left side ofthe steering wheel.

Ensure that you use the HFLbuttons, not the NAVI buttons, togive HFL voice commands.

HFL Talk: This button is used beforeyou give a command, and to answerincoming calls.

HFL Back: This button is used toend a call, go back to the previousvoice control command, and tocancel an operation.

Press and release the button, thenwait for a beep before giving acommand.

HFL ButtonsAudio System


Features

219

NOTE:

HFL TALKBUTTON

HFL BACK BUTTON

NAVI VOICECONTROLBUTTONS

０８／０７／１９　０９：５５：１３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２２４　

When you are operating HFL, dialingor receiving calls with the audiosystem in use, you will see the abovescreen on the navigation display.

On the map screen, you will see a‘‘HFL’’ message on the screen.

A indicator will also bedisplayed on the screen if yourphone is linked to HFL.


Information Display

220

HFL MESSAGE

BLUETOOTH INDICATOR

０８／０７／１９　０９：５５：２０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２２５　

CONTINUED

HFL is operated by the HFL Talkand Back buttons on the left side ofthe steering wheel. The next fewpages provide instructions for allbasic features of HFL.

Here are some guidelines for usingvoice control:

Adjust the airflow from both thedashboard and side vents so theydo not blow against themicrophone on the ceiling.

Close the windows and themoonroof.

To enter a command, press andrelease the HFL Talk button. Afterthe beep, say your command in aclear, natural tone.

Lower the A/C fan speed duringvoice recognition operation.

If the microphone picks up voicesother than yours, the system maynot interpret your voicecommands correctly.

If HFL does not recognize acommand, its response is ‘‘Pardon.’’If it doesn’t recognize thecommand it plays an appropriateHelp prompt. Response time mayvary depending on the voicecommand.

To hear a list of available optionsat any time, press the HFL Talkbutton, wait for the beep, and say‘‘Hands free help’’ or ‘‘Help.’’

When you are at the main menu,you can hear general HFLinformation such as pairing orsetting up the system. Press theHFL Talk button, wait for the beep,and say ‘‘Tutorial.’’

Many commands can be spokentogether. For example, you cansay, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’

To enter a string of numbers in aCall or Dial command, you can saythem all at once, or you canseparate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,10, and 11.

To skip a voice prompt, press theHFL Talk button while HFL isspeaking. HFL will then beginlistening for your next command.


How to Use HFL

All phones may notoperate identically, and somemay cause inconsistent operationof HFL.

Using Voice Control

Features

221

NOTE:

０８／０７／１９　０９：５５：３３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２２６　

To go back one step in a commandprocess, say ‘‘Go back,’’ or pressthe HFL Back button.If nothing is said while HFL islistening for a command, HFL willtime out and stop its voicerecognition, then prompt you withavailable options or helpinformation. The next time youpress the HFL Talk button, HFLbegins listening from the point atwhich it timed out.

To end a command sequence atany time, press and hold the HFLBack button, or press and releasethe HFL Talk button, wait for thebeep, and say ‘‘Cancel.’’ The nexttime you press the HFL Talkbutton, HFL begins from the mainmenu.

When you finish a commandsequence, HFL returns to idle. Forexample, when you store the name‘‘Eric,’’ the HFL system responseis ‘‘Eric has been stored.’’ Thenext time you press the HFL Talkbutton, HFL begins from the mainmenu.

Your Bluetooth compatible phonewith Hands Free Profile must bepaired to HFL before you can makeand receive hands-free calls. Toconfirm that your phone isBluetooth compatible, visit

, or call (888)528-7876. In Canada, call (888) 9-HONDA-9. Your phone retailershould also be able to confirm thatyour phone is Bluetooth compatible.

HFL does not allow you to pairyour phone if the vehicle ismoving.

For pairing, your phone must be inits discovery mode (searching fora Bluetooth related device).

Up to six phones can be paired toHFL.

The following procedure works formost phones. If you cannot pairyour phone to HFL with thisprocedure, refer to your phone’soperating manual, visit

, call theHandsFreeLink consumersupport at (888) 528-7876, or callyour phone retailer. In Canada,call (888) 9-HONDA-9.

Your phone’s battery may drainfaster when it is paired to HFL.




Pairing Your Phone

NOTE:

222

０８／０７／１９　０９：５５：４２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２２７　

＜＞

＊

＊

CONTINUED

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, if you say ‘‘Yes.’’HFL responds ‘‘Entering phoneset up: pair menu. The pairingprocess requires operation of yourBluetooth phone. For safety, onlyperform this function while thevehicle is stopped.’’HFL responds ‘‘For proper systemfunction a compatible Bluetoothphone is required. Please visit theHandsFreeLink website, listed inthe owner’s manual, for a list ofapproved phones and other systeminformation. HandsFreeLink iswaiting to pair with a Bluetoothphone. From your phone, searchfor Bluetooth devices and selectHandsFreeLink.’’

During the pairing process, turnoff any previously paired phonesbefore pairing a new phone.

Each time a phone is paired withHFL, the system selects a pairingcode randomly or sequentially.You can switch this settingbetween random mode and fixedmode. To select a pairing codesetting between Random andFixed, refer to page .

If after three minutes your phoneis not ready to pair or a phone isnot found, the system will time outand return to idle.

Park your vehicle. With yourphone on and the ignition switch inthe ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position, press and release theTalk button.HFL prompts ‘‘Welcome toBluetooth HandsFreeLink. Thissystem enables hands-free usageof a mobile phone. Before usingthis system, a phone needs to bepaired or connected withHandsFreeLink. Would you like topair a phone now? Press theBluetooth HandsFreeLink Talkbutton, and after the beep, say Yes,to begin the pairing process, or No,to continue.’’

HFL responds ‘‘When promptedby your mobile phone, enter thepairing code: 1234 .’’

Go to Step 4.

1.

2.

: For example

228

To pair your first phone, follow theprompts on the HFL system:


Features

223

０８／０７／１９　０９：５５：５１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２２８　

＜＞

Steps 4 and 5 show acommon way to get your phone intoits discovery mode (searching for aBluetooth related device). If thesesteps do not work on your phone,refer to the phone’s operatingmanual.

Follow the prompts on your phoneto get it into its discovery mode.The phone will search for HFL.When it comes up, selectHandsFreeLink from the list ofoptions displayed on your phone.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, if you say No, HFLresponds ‘‘Would you like to hearthe Bluetooth HandsFreeLinktutorial now? Press the Talkbutton and after the beep, say yesto begin the tutorial, or say No toexit HandsFreeLink.’’

If you say Yes, HFL will begin thetutorial. Follow the prompts onHFL.

When asked by the phone, enterthe four-digit code from step 3 intoyour phone.HFL responds ‘‘HandsFreeLinkhas connected to a new phone. Aname is needed to identify thisphone. Press the Talk button andsay a name. For example, John’sphone.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to use. For example, say‘‘John’s phone.’’HFL responds ‘‘ John’s phonehas been successfully paired.’’HFL responds ‘‘Would you like tohear the BluetoothHandsFreeLink tutorial now?Press the Talk button and afterthe beep, say Yes to begin thetutorial, or say No to exitHandsFreeLink.’’

If you press and release the Talkbutton and say ‘‘Yes,’’ HFL beginsTutorial. If you say ‘‘No,’’ HFLreturns to idle.

3.

6.4.

5.


224

NOTE:

０８／０７／１９　０９：５５：５９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２２９　

＜＞

＜＞

CONTINUED

To pair another phone, do this: To rename a paired phone, do this:With your phone on and theignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Phone setup.’’HFL responds ‘‘Phone setupoptions are pair, edit, delete, list,status, next phone, and set pairingcode. Press the Talk button andsay a command.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’

Repeat steps 2 through 6 on pagesand .

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’HFL responds ‘‘Phone setupoptions are pair, edit, delete, list,status, next phone, and set pairingcode. Press the Talk button andsay a command.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ HFLresponds ‘‘Which phone would liketo edit? Press the Talk button, andsay a name, or say List, to hear thenames of the paired phones’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to rename.For example, say ‘‘John’s phone.’’HFL responds ‘‘What is the newname for John’s phone? Press theTalk button and say a name.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the new nameof the phone. For example, say‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’HFL responds ‘‘The name hasbeen changed.’’

With only one paired phone, forexample, John’s phone , HFLresponds ‘‘What is the new namefor John’s phone ?’’ Then go tostep 4.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.1.

4.

223 224


Features

225

０８／０７／１９　０９：５６：１１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２３０　

＜＞

＜＞

To delete a paired phone, do this: To list all paired phones, do this:Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’HFL responds ‘‘Phone setupoptions are pair, edit, delete, list,status, next phone, and set pairingcode. Press the Talk button andsay a command.’’


Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’HFL responds by listing the nameof each paired phone. When allphones paired to the system havebeen read, HFL responds ‘‘Theentire list has been read.’’

‘‘Go back’’ or ‘‘Cancel’’ does notdelete the phone.

HFL responds ‘‘The phone hasbeen deleted.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, if you say‘‘Continue.’’

HFL responds ‘‘Preparing todelete John’s phone. Press theTalk button and say Continue;otherwise say Go Back or Cancel.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to delete. Forexample, say ‘‘John’s phone.’’ HFLresponds ‘‘Would you like to deleteJohn’s phone? Press the Talkbutton and say Yes or No.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’HFL responds ‘‘Which phonewould like to delete? Press theTalk button and say a name, or saylist, to hear the names of thepaired phone.’’

With only one paired phone, forexample, John’s phone , HFLresponds ‘‘Would you like to delete

John’s phone ?’’ Then go tostep 4.

1.

4.

5.

2.

3.

2.

1.


226

０８／０７／１９　０９：５６：２３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２３１　

＜＞

CONTINUED

To find out the status of the phone beingused, do this:

To change from the currently linkedphone to another paired phone, do this:



If no other phones are found orpaired, the first phone remainslinked. For example, HFLresponds ‘‘No other paired phoneswere found/have been paired.Returning to John’s phone .’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ Forexample, HFL responds ‘‘John’sphone is linked. Battery strengthis three bars. Signal strength isfive bars, and the phone isroaming.’’

Some Phones may not send thestatus information to the HFLsystem.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’HFL responds ‘‘Searching for thenext phone.’’The system then disconnects thelinked phone and searches foranother paired phone. If thesystem finds it, for example, HFLresponds ‘‘Paul’s phone is linked.’’

2.

1. 1.

2.


Features

227

０８／０７／１９　０９：５６：３３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２３２　

When you pair your phone to HFL,the HFL system will automaticallyselect a pairing code at random or inorder. You can customize this settingmode between Random and Fixed. Ifyou select the fixed mode, the HFLsystem will select a pairing codesequentially.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Set PairingCode.’’HFL responds ‘‘Each time a phoneis paired with HandsFreeLink, apairing code is used for security.This code can be randomlygenerated by HandsFreeLink, orfixed, which is needed for someBluetooth devices with a presetpairing code. Would you like to setthe pairing code as Random orFixed?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, to select the fixedmode, say ‘‘Fixed.’’HFL responds ‘‘What is the four-digit number you would like to seeas the pairing code? Press the Talkbutton and say the number.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say a desired four-digit number. For example, say‘‘1000.’’HFL responds ‘‘1000. Is thiscorrect? Press the Talk button andsay Yes or No.’’


If the number is not correct, say‘‘No.’’ HFL goes back to step 3.

HFL responds ‘‘HandsFreeLinkwill use this code when pairing to aBluetooth device.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, if the number iscorrect, say ‘‘Yes.’’

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

To change the setting mode, do this:


Setting a Pairing Code

228

０８／０７／１９　０９：５６：４３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２３３　

CONTINUED

You can select or change somesettings for the HFL system. Hereare the settings you can select orchange. To do this, make sure yourvehicle is parked safely, with yourphone on and the ignition switch inthe ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position.

You can set a four-digit securitypasscode to lock the HFL systemfor security purposes.

If you forget your passcode, youcannot activate HFL. Consult yourdealer to cancel the passcode.

The incoming notification can beset to a ring tone, a prompt, or nonotification. The default setting isa prompt.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘System setup.’’HFL responds ‘‘System setupoptions are security, changepasscode, call notification, autotransfer, and clear. Press the Talkbutton and say a command.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Security.’’HFL responds ‘‘Security isdisabled. Would you like to enablesecurity? Press the Talk buttonand say Yes or No.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’HFL responds ‘‘What is the four-digit number you would like to setas your security passcode? Pressthe Talk button and say thenumber.’’

If you say ‘‘No,’’ HFL returns toidle.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the four-digitpasscode you want to use. Forexample, say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’HFL responds ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is thiscorrect? Press the Talk button andsay Yes or No.’’

You can also select a ‘‘SystemClear’’ command to reset HFL(see page ).

You can change the securitypasscode.

3.

1.

2.

4.

250

To set a security passcode, do this:


Setting Up the System

Setting a security passcode

Selecting the incomingnotif ication

Changing a security passcode

Features

229

０８／０７／１９　０９：５６：５６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２３４　

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’HFL responds ‘‘Security is on.Each time the vehicle is turned on,the passcode will be required touse the system. If you forget thispasscode, you must either go tothe dealer to have it reset, or clearthe entire system using theSystem Clear command.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, HFL prompts ‘‘Thesystem is locked. What is the four-digit passcode?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say your four-digitpasscode. For example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3,4.’’

If the passcode is correct, HFLresponds ‘‘System is unlocked.’’


Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Changepasscode.’’HFL responds ‘‘What is the fourdigit number you would like to seeas your security passcode? Pressthe Talk button and say thenumber.’’

If the passcode is not correct, pleasetry again according to the HFL’sguidance.

Once a passcode is set, HFL willprompt you for your passcode eachtime the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position and you pressthe Talk button. You will only beasked for the passcode once perignition cycle.

You can also select a ‘‘System Clear’’command to reset HFL (see page

).Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say your four-digitpasscode, for example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3,4.’’

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

5.

250

To enter your passcode, do this; To change your security passcode, dothis:


230

０８／０７／１９　０９：５７：０７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２３５　

To set the incoming notification, do this: If you say, ‘‘Prompt.’’ HFL responds‘‘An incoming call prompt will beused.’’ You will hear a ‘‘You have anincoming call.’’ prompt whenreceiving an incoming call.

If you say, ‘‘Off,’’ no audiblenotification of an incoming call willbe selected. During an incoming call,there is no ring tone or promptplayback. The audio system will stillmute, and the HFL message or theHFL notification screen will bedisplayed.


Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Callnotification.’’HFL responds: ‘‘Would you likethe incoming call notification to bea ring tone, a prompt or off?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, for example, say‘‘Ring tone.’’HFL responds ‘‘A ring tone will beused.’’ You will hear a ring tonethrough the audio speakers toannounce an incoming call.

If the passcode is correct, HFLresponds ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct?Press the Talk button and say Yesor No.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’HFL responds ‘‘Security passcodehas been changed.’’

2.

1.

3.

4.

5.


Features

231

０８／０７／１９　０９：５７：１６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２３６　

You can make calls using any phonenumber, or by using a name in theHFL phonebook. You can also redialthe last number called. During a call,HFL allows you to talk up to 30minutes after you remove the keyfrom the ignition switch. Continuinga call without running the enginemay discharge and weaken thevehicle’s battery.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’HFL responds ‘‘Calling’’ or‘‘Dialing.’’Once connected, you will hear theperson you called through theaudio speakers. To change thevolume, use the audio systemvolume knob or the steering wheelvolume controls.

To end the call, press the Backbutton.

With your phone on and theignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’HFL responds ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial? Press the Talk button and saya name, a number, or say list tohear the phonebook entries.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to call. For example, say‘‘123 456 7891.’’HFL responds ‘‘123 456 7891.Press the Talk button andcontinue to add numbers, or sayCall or Dial to place a call.’’

4.

2.

1.

3.To make a call using a phone number,do this:


Making a Call

232

０８／０７／１９　０９：５７：２５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２３７　

To make a call from the list shown onthe navigation display, do this:

Press the INFO button to showthe information screen, then selecta ‘‘Cellular Phonebook’’ icon.

The screen is changed as shownabove.

Say or select a ‘‘Search ImportedPhonebook’’ icon.

Select a desired phonebook (seepage ).

Select a name from the list on thescreen. The ‘‘Select a number tocall’’ screen is displayed.

Select the desired number fromthe list to store it in HFL.

The ‘‘Select a number to store’’screen is displayed. Select adesired number to call.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.244

CONTINUED


Features

233

０８／０７／１９　０９：５７：３６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２３８　

To redial the last number called by thephone, do this:

To make a call using a name in the HFLphonebook, do this:

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Redial.’’HFL responds ‘‘Redialing.’’Once connected, you will hear theperson you called through the audiospeakers. To change the volume, usethe audio system volume knob or thesteering wheel volume controls.


Once connected, you will hear theperson you called through theaudio speakers. To change thevolume, use the audio systemvolume knob or the steering wheelvolume controls.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’HFL responds ‘‘Calling’’ or‘‘Dialing.’’

HFL responds ‘‘Would you like tocall John? Press the Talk buttonand say Yes or No.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to call. For example, say‘‘John.’’

HFL responds ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial? Press the Talk button and saya name, a number, or say list tohear the phonebook entries.’’

With your phone on and theignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Call.’’ HFLresponds ‘‘Dialing the numberreceived from the navigationsystem. To end the call, pleasepress the BluetoothHandsFreeLink Back button onthe steering wheel.’’

1.

2.

3.

4.

8.


234

０８／０７／１９　０９：５７：４６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２３９　

＃

HFL allows you to send numbers ornames during a call. This is usefulwhen you call a menu-driven phonesystem. You can also programaccount numbers into the HFLphonebook for easy retrieval duringmenu-driven calls.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’HFL responds ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to send?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to send. For example,say ‘‘1, 2, 3.’’HFL responds ‘‘1, 2, 3. Press theTalk button and continue to addnumbers or say send.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’HFL responds ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to send?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to send. For example, say‘‘Account number.’’HFL responds ‘‘Would you like tosend account number? Press theTalk button and say Yes or No.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The dialtones will be sent, and the call willcontinue.

To send a pound ( ), say‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say‘‘star.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ Thedial tones will be sent, and the callwill continue.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

1.To send a number during a call, do this: To send a name during a call, do this:


Sending Numbers or NamesDuring a Call

Features

235

NOTE:

０８／０７／１９　０９：５７：５８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２４０　

If you receive a call when you are noton the phone, HFL interrupts theaudio system (if it is on), and playsthe incoming call notification, ifactivated. To answer the call, pressthe Talk button and begin speaking.If you don’t want to answer the call,press the Back button.

If your phone has call waiting, andyou receive a call when you are onthe phone, press and release theTalk button to answer it. When youdo this, the original call is placed onhold. To return to the original call,press the Talk button again. If youdon’t want to answer the new call,disregard it, and continue with youroriginal call. If you want to hang upthe original call and answer the newcall, press the Back button.

You can transfer a call from HFL toyour phone, or from your phone toHFL.

To transfer a call from HFL to yourphone, or from your phone to HFL,do this:Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ Theaudio switches between HFL and thephone.

This function allows you to transfer acall automatically to the HFL system.If you get into the vehicle while youare on the phone, a call will betransferred automatically to the HFLsystem when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I)position.

With this function activated, you canalso make a call by dialing with thenumber keys on the phone whichhas been paired to the HFL system.

The automatic transferring functioncan be set to on or off.


Receiving a Call Transferring a Call Automatic Transferring

236

０８／０７／１９　０９：５８：０６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２４１　

To activate this function, do this:

To mute your voice, do this:

To unmute your voice, do this:

During a call, you can mute orunmute your voice to the person youare talking to.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’HFL responds ‘‘Mute is active.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’HFL responds ‘‘Mute is canceled.’’


Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Auto transfer.’’If this feature is set to off, HFLresponds ‘‘Auto transfer isdisabled. Calls dialed on the phonedo not automatically transfer toBluetooth HandsFreeLink. Wouldyou like to enable Auto Transfer?Press the Talk button and say Yesor No.’’

Never try to dial from yourphone directly if the vehicle ismoving.


When you make a call directly fromthe phone with the auto transfer on,make sure to stop your vehicle safely.

HFL responds ‘‘Auto transfer isenabled.’’

If the setting changes from off toon, press and release the Talkbutton. After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’

If this feature is set to on, HFLresponds ‘‘Auto-transfer is enabled.Calls dialed on the phone will beautomatically transferred toBluetooth HandsFreeLink. Wouldyou like to disable Auto Transfer?

Press the Talk button and say Yesor No.’’

If the setting changes from on to off,HFL responds ‘‘Auto transfer isdisabled. Use the Transfer commandat the HandsFree main menu tomanually transfer calls dialed on thephone.’’

1.

2.

3.


Muting a Call

Features

237

NOTE:

０８／０７／１９　０９：５８：２０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２４２　

＜＞

＜＞

＜＞

＜＞

The HFL phonebook can store up to50 names with their associatednumbers. These can be any types ofnumbers. For example, you can storea phone number and use it to make acall, or you can store an accountnumber and use it during a call to amenu-driven phone system.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to store. For example,say ‘‘ John Smith .’’HFL responds ‘‘What is thenumber for John Smith ? Pressthe Talk button and say thenumber.’’

Avoid using duplicate nameentries.

Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a nameentry.

HFL will be able to betterrecognize multisyllabic nameentries (‘‘Peter’’ instead of ‘‘Pete’’),or using a longer name (‘‘JohnSmith’’ instead of ‘‘John’’).Press and release the Talk button.

After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’HFL responds ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete,receive contact, and list. Press theTalk button and say a command.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’HFL responds ‘‘What name wouldyou like to store? Press the Talkbutton and say a name.’’

You can also say an accountnumber instead of John Smith .

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the number.For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’HFL responds ‘‘123 456 7891.Press the Talk button andcontinue to add numbers or sayEnter.’’

Use a consistent, even tone andreduce background noise whenstoring names, as the HFL voicerecognition can be sensitive.

HFL responds ‘‘ John Smithhas been stored.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’

5.

4.1.

2.

3.

To add a name, do this:


NOTE:Setting Up the Phonebook

238

０８／０７／１９　０９：５８：３３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２４３　

CONTINUED

To delete a name, do this:To edit the number of a name, do this:Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’HFL responds ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete,receive contact, and list. Press theTalk button and say a command.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to edit. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’HFL responds ‘‘What is the newnumber for Eric? Press the Talkbutton and say the number.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’HFL responds ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete,receive contact, and list. Press theTalk button and say a command.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’HFL responds ‘‘What name wouldyou like to edit? Press the Talkbutton and say a name or say listto hear the phonebook entries.’’

If only one number is stored, HFLresponds ‘‘What is the newnumber for Eric?’’ Then go to step4.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the newnumber for Eric. For example, say‘‘987 654 3219.’’HFL responds ‘‘987 654 3219.Press the Talk button andcontinue to add numbers or sayenter.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’HFL responds ‘‘The number hasbeen changed.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’HFL responds ‘‘What name wouldyou like to delete? Press the Talkbutton and say a name or say listto hear the phonebook entries.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to delete. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’HFL responds ‘‘Would you like todelete Eric? Press the Talk buttonand say Yes or No.’’

2.

3.

5.

1.

2.

1.

4.

3.


Features

239

０８／０７／１９　０９：５８：４６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２４４　

＜＞

＜＞

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’HFL responds ‘‘The name hasbeen deleted.’’



Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’

HFL responds by listing the namesin the phonebook in the order whichthey were stored. After all names arelisted, HFL responds ‘‘The entire listhas been read.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’HFL responds by listing thenames in the phonebook. When itsays the name you want to call, forexample, Eric , press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Call.’’ HFL responds‘‘Would you like to call Eric ?Press the Talk button and say Yesor No.’’

Once connected, you will hear theperson you called through the audiospeakers. To change the volume, usethe audio system volume knob or thesteering wheel volume controls.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ HFLresponds ‘‘Calling.’’

1.

4.

2.

1.

2.

3.

To list all names in the phonebook, dothis:

To call a name from the phonebook list,do this:


240

０８／０７／１９　０９：５８：５７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２４５　

＜＞

＜＞

CONTINUED

You can store the desired number tothe HFL phonebook directly fromyour cell phone.



Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to store. For example,say ‘‘Neil at work.’’

With your phone on and theignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Phonebook.’’HFL responds ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete,receive contact, and list. Press theTalk button and say a command.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Receivecontact.’’HFL responds ‘‘The receiveprocess requires operation of yourBluetooth device. For safety, onlyperform this function while thevehicle is stopped. HandsFreeLinkis now waiting to receive a contactfrom a Bluetooth device.’’

Select a desired number from thelist on your phone, and send it viaBluetooth (steps will vary forphone types, follow your phone’soperating manual).HFL responds, for example ‘‘ 2phone numbers have beenreceived for this contact. Whatname would you like to store forthe mobile number

1234567891 ? Press the Talkbutton and say a name or sayDiscard, to discard this number.’’

HFL responds ‘‘Neil at work willbe stored. Is this correct? Pressthe Talk button and say Yes or No.’’

HFL responds ‘‘Neil at work hasbeen stored. Would you likeHandsFreeLink to receive anothercontact? Press the Talk button andsay Yes or No.’’

Go to step 6.

If you say, ‘‘No,’’ HFL returns toidle.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, if you say ‘‘Yes.’’

2. 4.

1.

3.

5.handsfreelink.honda.com


Storing a Phone Number Directlyfrom Your Phone

Features

241

NOTE:

０８／０７／１９　０９：５９：０８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２４６　

The cellular phonebook optionallows you to store up to 1,000 namesand 10,000 phone numbers in thephonebook of BluetoothHandsFreeLink from your cellularphonebook. The maximum namesand numbers to be stored varies onthe data size. With HFL, you canthen automatically dial any name ornumber in the phonebook.



To use the cellular phonebook withHFL, say or select a ‘‘CellularPhonebook’’ icon from theinformation screen. The navigationdisplay will change as shown above.

If any phonebook is not stored andyour phone is not linked to HFL,Cellular Phonebook icon is grayedout.

If you want to continue to storeany other numbers, press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Yes.’’HFL responds ‘‘HandsFreeLink isnow waiting to receive a contactfrom a Bluetooth device.’’

Go back to step 3.

6.


Cellular Phonebook Options


242

NOTE:

０８／０７／１９　０９：５９：１５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２４７　

CONTINUED

To import the cellular phonebookSearch Imported Phonebook: Thisoption allows you to search thephone numbers stored in HFL.When you enter a person’s firstname or last name, the system willfind the number you want and letyou make calls.

Import Cellular Phonebook: Thisoption allows you to store thephonebook of your cellular phone inHFL. When you link your phone toHFL and select this option, thesystem will start importing andloading the phonebook.

Delete Imported Phonebook: Thisoption allows you to delete the storedphonebook from HFL. When youlink your phone to HFL and selectthis option, the system willautomatically delete the phonebookof the linked phone from HFL (seepage ).

Before selling or discardingyour vehicle, make sure to delete theimported phonebook data.

PIN Number: This option allows youto add, change, or remove a PINnumber for any phonebook that hasbeen imported.

You can import the phonebook ofyour cellular phone into HFL. Linkyour phone to HFL, and select‘‘Cellular Phonebook’’ from theinformation screen, then select‘‘Import Cellular Phonebook’’ fromthe ‘‘Select an option’’ screen. Whenthe message ‘‘The import wassuccessful’’ is displayed, touch thescreen to select ‘‘OK.’’247


Features

243

NOTE:

０８／０７／１９　０９：５９：２４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２４８　

To search the imported phonebook

You can search the stored numberby entering keywords to make callsby using HFL.

Select ‘‘Cellular Phonebook’’ fromthe information screen, then select‘‘Search Imported Phonebook’’ fromthe ‘‘Select an option’’ screen. Thedisplay will change as shown above.

Select a phonebook from thedisplayed list. If the phonebook youselect has a PIN icon, you will needthe four-digit PIN number to accessthe phonebook. The following screenwill appear.

HFL does not allow you to importyour phone if your phone is notpaired to HFL.For more information on pairingyour cell phone to HFL, see page

.222


NOTE:

244

IMPORTED PHONEBOOK PIN ICON

IMPORTED DATE

０８／０７／１９　０９：５９：３１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２４９　

CONTINUED

The system will display a list ofperson’s names, with the closestmatch to the name you entered atthe top of the list.

Enter the PIN number. You cannotaccess a PIN protected phonebook ifyou do not use the correct PINnumber.

Enter the person’s first name or lastname, using the joystick or touchingan appropriate icon. If the systemdoes not find an exact match, say orselect ‘‘LIST’’ when you finishentering the keyword.


Features

245

List ICON

０８／０７／１９　０９：５９：３８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２５０　

Select the desired number from thelist to store it in HFL.

The following category icons willappear:

Say or select ‘‘Store inHandsFreeLink’’ from the ‘‘Select anumber to call’’ screen. The screenshown above will appear.

Up to three category icons aredisplayed in the left side of the list.These category icons indicate howmany numbers are stored for theperson. If a name has more thanthree category icons, ‘‘…’’ isdisplayed.

After selecting a person, the systemwill display a list of the person’sphone numbers.

Select the desired number from thelist to make a call.

To store a number in the BluetoothHandsFreeLink


246

Work

Home

Preference

Mobile

Pager

Fax

Car

Voice

Other

０８／０７／１９　０９：５９：５１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２５１　

CONTINUED

To delete the imported phonebook

You can delete the storedphonebook from HFL. Link yourphone to HFL and select ‘‘CellularPhonebook’’ from the informationscreen, then select ‘‘Delete ImportedPhonebook’’ from the ‘‘Select anoption’’ screen. The display willchange as shown above.

Select a phonebook from thedisplayed list. If the phonebook youselect has a PIN icon, you will needthe four-digit PIN number to accessthe phonebook. The following screenwill appear.

Enter the PIN number. You cannotaccess a PIN protected phonebook ifyou do not use the correct PINnumber.

After you enter the correct PINnumber, or if the phonebook youselect is not PIN protected, thefollowing screen appears.

Say or select ‘‘Yes’’, and the message‘‘The imported phonebook has beendeleted.’’ will appear. Select ‘‘OK’’ tocomplete the deletion.


Features

247

０８／０７／１９　０９：５９：５９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２５２　

To add, change, or remove a PINnumber from any phonebook

To add a PIN number

You can add, change, or remove aPIN number from any phonebook.Select ‘‘Cellular Phonebook’’ fromthe information screen, then select‘‘PIN Number’’ from the ‘‘Select anoption’’ screen. The display willchange as shown above.

Select the phonebook you wish toadd the PIN number to. When youselect the phonebook without aPIN icon, the display will changeas shown above.

Enter the four-digit PIN number.You will be asked to re-enter thePIN to verify.

1. 2.


248

０８／０７／１９　１０：００：０７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２５３　

To change a PIN number

Enter your new four-digit PINnumber. You will be asked to re-enter the PIN to verify.

Select the phonebook that youwish to change the PIN numberfor. The display will change asshown above.

Enter your current PIN number.

1.

2.

3.


Features

249

０８／０７／１９　１０：００：１４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２５４　

This operation clears the HFL ofyour passcode, your paired phones,all names in the HFL phonebook,and all imported phonebooks.Clearing is recommended before yousell your vehicle.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’HFL responds ‘‘Preparing to clearthe system, which may take up totwo minutes to complete. Toproceed, press the Talk button andsay Continue, otherwise say GoBack or Cancel.’’

After saying Continue, HFLresponds ‘‘Please wait while thesystem is cleared.’’ HFL responds‘‘The system has been cleared.’’


Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’HFL responds ‘‘This process willclear all paired phones, clear allentries in the phonebook, clear thesecurity passcode, and restore thedefaults in the system setup. Isthis what you would like to do?press the Talk button and say yesor no.’’

2. 4.

1.3.To clear the system, do this:


Clearing the System

250

０８／０７／１９　１０：００：２２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２５５　

＜＞Canadian models only

All paired phones missing a Frenchname tag are recorded, the HFLsystem returns to idle.

This process will also be required ifthere are paired phones withoutEnglish tags when changing fromFrench to English. HFL responds‘‘For the system to identify phonesthat were paired while in anotherlanguage, the phone names need tobe re-recorded.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Oui’’ or ‘‘Yes.’’If there are no paired phoneswithout French name tags, HFLresponds ‘‘Veuillez attendre que lesystème change de langue. Pleasewait while the language is changed.’’HFL responds ‘‘La langue a étéchangée.’’

To change language, say a commandwith the current selected language.The following example is changingthe language from English to French.

If there are paired phoneswithout French name tags, thefollowing prompts will continue.

If there are paired phones withoutFrench name tags, HFL responds‘‘La langue a été changée. Pour quele système identifie les téléphonesqui ont été jumelés dans une autrelangue, les noms des téléphonesdoivent etre ré-enregistrés.’’

Example for changing name tags:HFL responds ‘‘Quel est le nomFrançais pour Paul’s phone ?’’Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Téléphone dePaul.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Changelanguage.’’HFL responds ‘‘English orFrench?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘French.’’HFL responds ‘‘Vous avezselectionné Français. Les nomsenregistres en mode Anglais neseron pas accessible en modeFrançais. Voulez-vous continuer?You have selected French. Nametags that were stored while inEnglish mode will not beaccessible in french mode. Wouldyou like to continue? Press theTalk button and say Yes or No.’’

2.

4.

1.

3.


Changing Language

Features

251

NOTE:

０８／０７／１９　１０：００：３２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２５６　

Canadian models onlyTo select a language quickly, do thefollowing.




Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Anglais.’’HFL responds ‘‘You have selectedEnglish. Name tags that werestored while in French mode willnot be accessible in English mode.Would you like to continue? Pressthe Talk button and say Yes or No.’’

For example, to change from Frenchto English.

If you want to continue, follow steps3 and 4 on page .

1.

251


Quick Language Selection

252

０８／０７／１９　１０：００：４０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２５７　

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 254.................Fuel Recommendation . 254

.........Service Station Procedures . 255....................................Refueling . 255

Opening and Closing the.......................................Hood . 256

...................................Oil Check . 257.............Engine Coolant Check . 258

...............................Fuel Economy . 259...Accessories and Modifications . 262

.............................Carrying Cargo . 264

Before Driving

Before

Driving

253

０８／０７／１９　１０：００：４４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２５８　

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 87 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour authorized dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10% ethanol byvolume and up to 15% MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

We recommend using qualitygasolines containing detergentadditives that help prevent fuelsystem and engine deposits.

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Quick Start Guide

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

254

０８／０７／１９　１０：００：５４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２５９　

To open the fuel fill door, pushdown the lever on the left of thedriver’s seat.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Thisleaves some room in the fuel tankfor the fuel to expand withtemperature changes.

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel filler with a tether. Place thecap in the holder on the fuel filldoor.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapor from going into theatmosphere. Try filling at anotherpump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

Service Station Procedures

Refueling

Before

Driving

255

Push

HOLDER FUEL FILL CAP

TETHER

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

０８／０７／２１　２０：２２：３１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２６０　

If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood near the center.Slide your hand to the left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up to release it.Lift up the hood.

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,the malfunction indicator lampmay come on (see page ). Youwill also see a ‘‘CHECK FUELCAP’’ message on the informationdisplay.

Holding the grip, pull the supportrod out of its clip. Insert the endinto the designated hole in thehood.

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

2.

1.

3.

5.

6.

337


Opening and Closing the Hood

256

LATCHHOOD RELEASE HANDLE

０８／０７／１９　１０：０１：１１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２６１　

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop. Make sure itis securely latched.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto its hole.

2.

3.

1.

4.

297


Oil Check

Adding Engine Oil

Before

Driving

257

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

SUPPORT ROD

CLIP

GRIP

０８／０７／１９　１０：０１：２２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２６２　

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

300

294Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks


258

MAX

MIN

RESERVE TANK

０８／０７／１９　１０：０１：２７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２６３　

－

－－

－

Fuel economy is not a fixed number.It varies based on driving conditions,driving habits and vehicle condition.Therefore, it is not possible for oneset of estimates to predict fueleconomy precisely for all drivers inall environments.

Provides an estimated annual fuelcost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000km) per year multiplied by the costper gallon (based on EPA fuel costdata) divided by the combined fueleconomy.

For more information on fueleconomy ratings and factors thataffect fuel economy, visit

(Canada: Visit)

Represents urbandriving in a vehicle in light traffic. Arange of miles per gallon achieved isalso provided.

The EPA fuel economy estimatesshown in the example to the rightare a useful tool for comparisonwhen buying a vehicle. EPAestimates include:

Represents a combination of city andhighway driving. The scalerepresents the range of combinedfuel economy for other vehicles inthe class.

Represents amixture of rural and interstatedriving, in a warmed-up vehicle,typical of longer trips in free-flowingtraffic. A range of miles per gallon

achieved is also provided.

www.fueleconomy.gov www.vehicles.gc.ca

Actual Mileage and EPA FuelEconomy Estimates Comparison.

Estimated Annual Fuel Cost

City MPGCombined Fuel Economy

Highway MPG

Fuel Economy

Before

Driving

259

Combined FuelEconomy

(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

Estimated AnnualFuel Cost

City MPG Highway MPG

０８／０７／１９　１０：０１：３６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２６４　

－

－

－－

－

－

－

Aggressive driving (hardacceleration and braking)Excessive idling, accelerating andbraking in stop-and-go trafficCold engine operation (enginesare more efficient when warmedup)Driving with a heavy load or theair conditioner runningImproperly inflated tires

An underinflated tire increases‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reducesfuel economy.

It puts a heavierload on the engine, increasing fuelconsumption.

Inparticular, a build-up of snow ormud on your vehicle’s undersideadds weight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fueleconomy.

The following factors can lower yourvehicle’s fuel economy:

A properly maintained vehiclemaximizes fuel economy. Poormaintenance can significantly reducefuel economy. Always maintain yourvehicle according to the maintenancemessages displayed on the multi-information display (see

on page ).For example:

Idlingresults in 0 miles per gallon.

If your vehicle has amanual transmission, you canboost your fuel economy by upshifting as early as possible.

Aerodynamic drag has a big effecton fuel mileage at speeds above 45mph (75 km/h). Reduce yourspeed and you reduce the drag.Trailers, car top carriers, roofracks and bike racks are also bigcontributors to increased drag.

Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking increase fuelconsumption.

294

Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscositymotor oil, displaying the APICertif ication Seal (see page

).Maintain proper tire inflation

Avoid carrying excess weight inyour vehicle

Keep your vehicle clean

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Avoid excessive idling

Always drive in the highest gearpossible

Observe the speed limit

Drive moderately

297

Drive Efficiently

Vehicle Maintenance

Fuel Economy

260

０８／０７／１９　１０：０１：４９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２６５　

－

－

Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.Reset trip counter to zero.Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.Follow one of the simple calculations above.

Direct calculation is therecommended source of informationabout your actual fuel economy.Using frequency of fill-ups or takingfuel gauge readings are NOTaccurate measures of fuel economy.Fuel economy may improve over thefirst several thousand miles.

The A/Cputs an extra load on the enginewhich makes it use more fuel. Usethe fresh-air ventilation whenpossible.

Combine several short trips intoone. A warmed-up engine is morefuel efficient than a cold one.

1)2)3)4)

Checking Your Fuel Economy

Measuring Techniques

Calculating Fuel Economy

Minimize the use of the airconditioning system

Plan and combine trips

Fuel Economy

Before

Driving

261

Milesdriven

Gallonsof fuel

Miles perGallon

100 KilometersL per

100 kmLiter

０８／０７／１９　１０：０１：５８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２６６　

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Before installing any accessory:Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withthe proper operation of yourvehicle.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. Accessories installed inthese areas may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags, anti-lock brakes, andtire pressure monitoring system (ifequipped).

339Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

262

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

０８／０７／１９　１０：０２：０７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２６７　

＊

＊

Some examples are:

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withnon-Honda components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents and will not becompatible with the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) .

Raising your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Lowering your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

: If equipped

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

Before

Driving

263

０８／０７／１９　１０：０２：１５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２６８　

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove boxDoor pockets

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, tires, and make itunsafe. Before carrying any type ofcargo, be sure to read the followingpages.

TrunkConsole compartmentCenter pocket

Carrying Cargo

264

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

CENTER POCKET

TRUNK

DOOR POCKETS

GLOVE BOX

０８／０７／１９　１０：０２：２２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２６９　

－ ×

－

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amountequals 1,400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb. passengers in yourvehicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs.(1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

Locate the statement ‘‘Thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’splacard.

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit

See Tire And Loading Informationlabel attached to the driver’sdoorjamb.

The maximum load for your vehicleis 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S. vehicles,and 395 kg for Canadian vehicles.

Label Example

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, andaccessories, and the tongue load ifyou are towing a trailer.

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(6)

(5)

(4)

CONTINUED

Load Limits

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

265

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

０８／０７／１９　１０：０２：３５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２７０　

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all occupants, accessories,cargo, and trailer tongue load mustnot exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). Bothare on a label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

Carrying Cargo

266

Max Load (850 lbs) Cargo Weight(550 lbs)

Max Load (850 lbs)

Max Load (850 lbs)

Cargo Weight(250 lbs)

Cargo Weight(100 lbs)

Passenger Weight(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)



０８／０７／１９　１０：０２：４６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２７１　

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

Do not put any items on the rearshelf that could cover the IMAbattery air intake. They can blockyour view, or be thrown aroundthe vehicle during a crash.

The air intake for the IMA batteryand electronics is located on top ofthe rear shelf. Do not block this airintake; it may cause the IMA batteryand the power control unit tooverheat, causing the IMA system toshut down. It will start working againafter it cools.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunderneath and interfere with theproper operation of the seats, thesensors under the seats, or thedriver’s ability to operate thepedals.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of carbon monoxidepoisoning, follow the instructionson page .

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

52

CONTINUED

Air IntakeCarrying Cargo in the TrunkCarrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

267

AIR INTAKE

０８／０７／１９　１０：０２：５５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２７２　

Do not spill any liquids over the airintake or put any small foreignobjects in it. This may damage theIMA battery and the power controlunit.

Carrying Cargo

268

０８／０７／１９　１０：０２：５８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２７３　

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate theautomatic transmissions (CVT). Italso includes important informationon parking your vehicle, the brakingsystem, the vehicle stability assist(VSA ) system, and the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS).

........................Preparing to Drive . 270.......................Starting the Engine . 271

.Automatic Transmission (CVT) . 272...........................................Parking . 278

.............................Braking System . 279...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 280

...........................Towing a Trailer . 281Tire Pressure Monitoring System

......................................(TPMS) . 282Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),

aka Electronic Stability........Control (ESC), System . 285

Driving

Driving

269

０８／０７／１９　１０：０３：０１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２７４　

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see page ).

Check that the hood and trunk arefully closed.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure (see page ).

1.

2.

3.

8.

7.

6.

14

9.4.

5.

57

10.

315

91

98

77

Preparing to Drive

270

０８／０７／１９　１０：０３：１１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２７５　

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown, and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 5.

In cold weather, the conventionalstarter is used instead of the IMAsystem starter. This is normal.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in the START (III)position for more than 15 secondsat a time. If the engine does notstart right away, pause for at least10 seconds before trying again.

1.

2.

3.

4.5.

6.

Starting the Engine

Starting in Cold Weather

Driving

271

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperlycoded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .79

０８／０７／１９　１０：０３：２０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２７６　

Honda’s Continuously VariableTransmission’s unique designprovides a smooth, constant flow ofpower. It is electronically controlledfor more precise operation andbetter fuel economy.

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem with theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT)

Shift Lever Position Indicators

Automatic Transmission (CVT)

272

０８／０７／１９　１０：０３：２６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２７７　

－To shift from Park to any position,press firmly on the brake pedal andpress the release button on the frontof the shift lever, then pull the lever.You cannot shift out of Park whenthe ignition switch is in the LOCK(0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position.

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the front of the shift leverto move it.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

You must also press the releasebutton to shift into Park. To avoidtransmission damage, come to acomplete stop before shifting intoPark. The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

275

To shift from:P to R

R to PN to RS to LL to SS to DD to ND to SN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpress the release button.

Press the release button.

Move the lever.

CONTINUED

Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

Shifting


Driving

273

SHIFT LEVERRELEASE BUTTON

０８／０７／１９　１０：０３：３４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２７８　

－

－

－

－

－

Press the brakepedal and press the release buttonon the front of the shift lever to shiftfrom Park to reverse. To shift fromreverse to neutral, come to acomplete stop, and then shift. Pressthe release button before shiftinginto reverse from neutral.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically adjusts tokeep the engine at the best speed fordriving conditions. To help theengine warm up faster, thetransmission will select ratios that

allow the engine to run at higherspeeds when it is cold.

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.

Selecting Secondshifts the transmission into a lowerrange of ratios for betteracceleration and increased enginebraking. Use Second when you aregoing down a steep hill.

To shift to Low, pressthe release button on the front of theshift lever. Use Low to get morepower when climbing, and formaximum engine braking whengoing down steep hills.

In L, the IMA charge and dischargecharacteristics will be different thanwhen the vehicle is in D or S. In L,the battery is charged at a higherrate both while driving and when theengine is idling at a stop. The enginewill idle at higher speeds when theIMA battery state of charge is lowand decrease as the battery reaches

a full state of charge.

For faster acceleration when in D, Sor L, the transmission willautomatically ‘‘kick down’’ to a lowerrange of ratios by pushing theaccelerator pedal to the floor.

When the vehicle reaches themaximum speed in any shift position,you may feel the engine cut in andout. This is caused by a limiter (112mph, 180 km/h) in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce thespeed to below the maximum.

Reverse (R)

Drive (D)

Neutral (N)

Second (S)

Low (L)

Engine Speed Limiter


274

０８／０７／１９　１０：０３：４２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２７９　

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Set the parking brake.

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then install thecover. Make sure the notch on thecover is on the shift lever side.Return the key to the ignitionswitch, press the brake pedal, andrestart the engine.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

Put a cloth on the notch of theshift lock release slot cover. Usinga small flat-tipped screwdriver or ametal fingernail file, carefully pryon the notch of the cover toremove it.

Do this if pushing on the brake pedaland pressing the release button doesnot let you shift the transmission outof Park:

Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the shift leverout of Park to neutral.

Insert the key in the shift lockrelease slot.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Shift Lock Release


Driving

275

SHIFT LOCKRELEASE SLOT

RELEASEBUTTON

NOTCHCOVER

０８／０７／１９　１０：０３：５１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２８０　

－

－

The Auto Idle Stop function mayactivate when you slow down.

The engine will start again when yourelease the brake pedal. It will alsorestart, even if you are still pressingthe brake pedal, under theseconditions:

You move the shift lever from Dor N to R or L.

You press the accelerator pedal.

You are on an incline, and thevehicle begins rolling.

To help maximize fuel economy,your Civic Hybrid has an Auto IdleStop function. Depending onenvironmental conditions and vehicleoperation, the engine will shut offwhen you come to a stop.

The engine coolant is nearly up tonormal operating temperature.

The IMA battery is chargedenough to operate the system.

Outside temperature is between10 100 degrees F.

The vehicle is not climbing a hill.

The shift lever is in D or N.

You are not pressing on theaccelerator pedal.

You are pressing on the brakepedal.

Fan speed lower fan speeds, ineither AUTO or manual modes.

The front window defroster is off.

Auto Idle Stop


According to driving conditions

According to vehicle controls

276

０８／０７／２１　２０：２１：１３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２８１　

If you open the driver’s door whenAuto Stop is active, the indicator willblink and you will hear a continuousbeep. The beep will stop when youclose the door.

With the driver’s door open, you willhear a continuous beep even if theAuto Idle Stop function isdeactivated and the engine restarts.

Always turn the ignition switch tothe LOCK (0) position and removethe key if you are getting out of thevehicle.The indicator blinks as a reminder

that the engine has stopped becauseof the Auto Idle Stop function. Youcannot restart the engine with theignition switch when this indicator isblinking.

Auto Idle Stop Indicator


Driving

277

AUTO IDLE STOP INDICATOR

０８／０７／１９　１０：０４：０９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２８２　

Make sure the windows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.Lock the doors.

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb.

Set the parking brake before you putthe transmission in Park. This keepsthe vehicle from moving and puttingpressure on the parking mechanismin the transmission.

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

Parking Tips

Parking

278

Never install a sunshade between theupper and lower meters on theinstrument panel. If you do, you couldcause heat damage to the upper meteron a very hot day.

０８／０７／１９　１０：０４：１９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２８３　

Your vehicle is equipped with frontdisc brakes. The brakes on the rearwheels are drum. A power assisthelps reduce the effort needed onthe brake pedal. The ABS helps youretain steering control when brakingvery hard.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, reduces their effectiveness andreduces brake pad life. In addition,fuel economy can be reduced. It alsokeeps your brake lights on all thetime, confusing drivers behind you.

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with anadvanced hydraulic booster.The advanced hydraulic booster hassome features.

This feature enables you to press thebrake pedal with less force by thehelp of hydraulic pressure in the oilpressure pump.

This feature controls the brakingpressure appropriately, coordinatingwith the regenerating brake of theIMA motor.

When you release the brake pedalwhile the Auto Idle Stop functionactivates, this feature keeps thebraking pressure until the enginestarts, and prevents the vehicle fromdropping back.

This feature helps you apply thebrakes with less force during anemergency braking situation.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Power-Assist

Cooperative Control with RegenerativeBrake

Creep Aid System

Brake-Assist

Braking System

Driving

279

０８／０７／１９　１０：０４：２８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２８４　

The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before the

ABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

If the ABS indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as shown onpage .338

You should never pump the brake pedal.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Braking System Design

Brake Pad Wear Indicators

ABS Indicator

280

０８／０７／１９　１０：０４：３６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２８５　

Your vehicle is not designed to tow atrailer. Attempting to do so can voidyour warranties.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the EBD system may alsobe shut down.

It only helps with steeringcontrol during braking.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

The VSA indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.

338

Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS), Towing a Trailer

Towing a TrailerImportant Safety RemindersABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

Driving

281

０８／０７／１９　１０：０４：４４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２８６　

When the low tire pressure indicatoris on, one or more of your tires issignificantly underinflated. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle’s tire information placard.

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly, and inflate the tire tothe recommended pressure shownon the driver’s doorjamb.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

If you cannot make the low tirepressure indicator go out afterinflating the tires to the specifiedvalues, have your dealer check thesystem as soon as possible.

Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure indicator maycome on unexpectedly.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor (not including the spare tire).If the air pressure of a tire becomessignificantly low while driving, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure indicator to come on.

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

324

U.S. models only Low Tire PressureIndicator

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

282

０８／０７／１９　１０：０４：５２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２８７　

For example, if you check and fillyour tires in a warm area, then drivein extremely cold weather, the tirepressure will be lower thanmeasured and could be underinflatedand cause the low tire pressureindicator to come on. Or, if youcheck and adjust your tire pressurein cooler conditions, and drive intoextremely hot conditions, the tiremay become overinflated. However,the low tire pressure indicator willnot come on if the tires areoverinflated.

Refer to page for tire inflationguidelines.

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when cold, andset to the recommended inflationpressure as specified on the tire

information label and in the owner’smanual (see page ).

This indicator comes on and stays onif there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system.

If this happens, the system will shutoff and no longer monitor tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

If the low tire pressure indicator orTPMS indicator comes on, the VSAsystem automatically turns on even ifthe VSA system is turned off bypressing the VSA OFF switch (seepage ). If this happens, youcannot turn the VSA system off bypressing the VSA OFF switch again.

When you restart the vehicle withthe compact spare tire, the TPMSindicator may also come on and stayon after driving several miles(kilometers).

315

316

286

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator


Driving

283

０８／０７／１９　１０：０５：００　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２８８　




If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure indicator will come on.Replace the flat tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

Each wheel (except the compactspare tire wheel) is equipped with atire pressure sensor mounted insidethe tire behind the valve stem. Youmust use TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer orqualified technician.

After you replace the flat tire withthe compact spare tire, the low tirepressure indicator stays on. This isnormal; the system is not monitoringthe spare tire pressure. Manuallycheck the spare tire pressure to besure it is correct. After several miles(kilometers) driving with thecompact spare tire, the TPMSindicator comes on and the low tirepressure indicator goes off.

The low tire pressure indicator orthe TPMS indicator will go off, afterseveral miles (kilometers) driving,when you replace the spare tire withthe specified regular tire equippedwith the tire pressure monitor sensor.

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

324

Changing a Tire with TPMS


284

０８／０７／１９　１０：０５：０８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２８９　

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA Activation indicator blink.

If this indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

The main function of theVSA system is generally known asElectronic Stability Control (ESC).The system also includes a tractioncontrol function.

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output andby selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. There may alsobe some noise from the VSAhydraulic system. You will also seethe VSA activation indicator blink.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

If the low tire pressure indicator orTPMS indicator comes on, the VSAsystem automatically turns on even ifthe VSA system is turned off bypressing the VSA OFF switch (seepage ). If this happens, youcannot turn the VSA system off bypressing the VSA OFF switch again.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

279

If equipped

On U.S. models

VSA Activation Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

Driving

285

NOTE:

０８／０７／１９　１０：０５：１８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２９０　

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.This switch is under the driver’s side

vent. To turn the VSA system on andoff, press and hold it until you hear abeep.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.Press and hold the switch again. Itturns the system back on.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

In certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallowmud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA systemis off, the traction control system isalso off. You should only attempt tofree your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.

Immediately after freeing yourvehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA andtraction control systems switched off.

319

VSA and Tire SizesVSA OFF Switch

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

286

VSA OFF SWITCH

０８／０７／１９　１０：０５：２６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２９１　

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance minder messages onthe information display, andinstructions for simple maintenancetasks you may want to take care ofyourself.

......................Maintenance Safety . 288....................Maintenance Minder . 289

..............................Fluid Locations . 296........................Adding Engine Oil . 297

.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 298..............................Engine Coolant . 300

....................Windshield Washers . 302........................Transmission Fluid .303

Continuously Variable............Transmission (CVT) . 303

....................................Brake Fluid . 304.............................................Lights . 305

................................Roof Antenna . 310................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 311

.....................................Floor Mats . 311..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 312

.................................Wiper Blades . 312...........................................Wheels . 315

...............................................Tires . 315......Checking the 12 Volt Battery . 321

.............................Vehicle Storage . 322

283

Maintenance

Maintenance

287

０８／０７／１９　１０：０５：３１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２９２　

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or qualifiedmechanic.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety PrecautionsInjury from moving parts.

Burns from hot parts.

Carbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Potential Vehicle Hazards

288

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

０８／０７／１９　１０：０５：４１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２９３　

－－－－－－－－－－－－

CONTINUED

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)100 % 91 %90 % 81 %80 % 71 %70 % 61 %60 % 51 %50 % 41 %40 % 31 %30 % 21 %20 % 16 %15 % 11 %10 % 6 %5 % 1 %

0 %

DisplayedEngine Oil Life (%)

100 %90 %80 %70 %60 %50 %40 %30 %20 %15 %10 %5 %0 %

Based on the engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

The remaining engine oil life isshown on the display according tothis table:

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and press the SEL/RESET button repeatedly until theengine oil life display appears (seepage ).

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items onthe information display to show youwhen you should have your dealerperform engine oil replacement andindicated maintenance service.

65

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life Display

Maintenance

289

SEL/RESET BUTTON

ENGINE OIL LIFE DISPLAY

０８／０７／１９　１０：０５：４８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２９４　

The maintenance item code or codesindicate the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change(see page ).

If the remaining engine oil life is 15to 6 percent, you will see the engineoil life indicator every time you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position. The maintenance minderindicator will also come on, and themaintenance item code(s) for otherscheduled maintenance itemsneeding service will be displayednext to the engine oil life indicator.

When the remaining engine oil life is5 to 1 percent, you will see a‘‘SERVICE OIL LIFE’’ messagealong with the same maintenanceitem code(s), every time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

295

Maintenance Minder

290

ENGINE OILLIFE DISPLAY

MAINTENANCEMINDER INDICATOR

MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)

０８／０７／１９　１０：０５：５４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２９５　

If you still do not perform theindicated maintenance, you will seenegative mileage. It is displayedwhen you drive more than 10 miles(for U.S. models) or 10 km (forCanadian models) after seeing the 0percent message. Afterward, itshows your driving distance if youcontinue to drive. Immediately havethe indicated maintenance done byyour dealer.

When the remaining engine oil life is0 percent, the engine oil life indicatorwill blink. The display comes onevery time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Whenyou see this message, have theindicated maintenance performed byyour dealer as soon as possible.

You can change the informationdisplay from the engine oil lifedisplay to the odometer, the tripmeter, or the outside temperatureevery time you press and release theSEL/RESET button.

When the engine oil life is 0 percentor negative mileage, themaintenance minder indicatorremains on even if you change theinformation display.

Immediately have the service done,and make sure to reset the display asdescribed on the next page.

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

291

０８／０７／１９　１０：０６：０１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２９６　

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the informationdisplay the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

Press the SEL/RESET buttonrepeatedly until the engine oil lifeis displayed.

All maintenance items displayed onthe information display are in code.For an explanation of thesemaintenance codes, see page .

Press the SEL/RESET button forabout 10 seconds. The engine oillife and the maintenance itemcode(s) will blink.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

1.

2.

3.

295

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay

292

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCESUB ITEM

０８／０７／１９　１０：０６：０９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２９７　

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show theproper maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.

Press the SEL/RESET button formore than 5 seconds. Themaintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’

However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out yourHonda Service History or CanadianMaintenance Log. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

We recommend using Honda partsand fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same highquality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

4.

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions

Maintenance

293

０８／０７／１９　１０：０６：１７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２９８　

－

－

－

－

－

－

＃

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,turn signals, brake lights, andlicense plate light monthly. Seepage .

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by theinformation display.

U.S. Vehicles:

257

258

303

304

315

305

Maintenance Minder

Owner’s Maintenance ChecksMaintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

294

０８／０７／１９　１０：０６：２５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０２９９　

＊

＊

＃

＃

＃

＊

Maintenance Minder

295

:

If the message ‘‘SERVICE OIL’’ does not appear more than 12 months afterthe display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

Independent of the maintenance minder display, replace the brake fluidevery 3 years.

Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .

Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).

NOTE:

:

294

Maintenance Sub ItemsRotate tiresReplace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replaceevery 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Replace dust and pollen filterIf you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry andfrom diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

Inspect drive beltReplace transmission fluidReplace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceReplace engine coolant

Maintenance Main ItemsReplace engine oilReplace engine oil and oil filterInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

AB

Symbol Symbol12

34

5

Main

tenance

Min

der

０８／０７／１９　１０：０６：３３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３００　

Fluid Locations

296

RADIATOR CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION (CVT)FLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

０８／０７／１９　１０：０６：３７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３０１　

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 0W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred0W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle for

optimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines’’.

A very low-viscosity, fuel-efficient0W-20 oil is the preferred enginelubricant for your Civic Hybrid. Thisspecial oil is formulated to help yourengine use less fuel. It is available atyour dealer. A 5W-20 oil may be usedif 0W-20 is not available.

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on the valve cover. Pour theoil slowly and carefully so you do notspill any. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes, and recheck the oil level onthe engine oil dipstick. Do not fillabove the upper mark; you coulddamage the engine.

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

Maintenance

297

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

Ambient Temperature

０８／０７／１９　１０：０６：４６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３０２　

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API certification seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the informationdisplay.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the informationdisplay. The oil and filter collectcontaminants that can damage yourengine if they are not removedregularly.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap.

Remove the nine holding clipswith a flat-tipped screwdriver andtwo bolts, then pull the under-cover down.

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

1.

2.

3. Only on U.S. models

Changing the Oil and FilterSynthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter

298

HOLDING CLIP

BOLTS

０８／０７／１９　１０：０６：５５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３０３　

Refill the engine with therecommended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

Remove the oil drain bolt andwasher from the bottom of theengine. Drain the oil into anappropriate container.

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Make sure the oil filter gasket isnot stuck to the engine block. If itis, remove it before installing anew oil filter.

7.

8.

9.4. 5.

6.

10.

CONTINUED

Changing the Oil and Filter

Maintenance

299

DRAIN BOLT

WASHER

OIL FILTER

3.4 US qt (3.2 )

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

０８／０７／１９　１０：０７：０６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３０４　

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel on the dipstick. If necessary,add more oil.

Put the under-cover back in placeand reinstall the nine holding clips.Lock the clips securely by pushingon the center of each clip.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to between theMIN and MAX lines. Inspect thecooling system for leaks.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

Always use Honda Long-life Anti-freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolantis pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent distilledwater. Never add straight antifreezeor plain water.

11.

12. Only on U.S. models

Adding Engine Coolant

Changing the Oil and Filter, Engine Coolant

300

RESERVE TANK

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

０８／０７／１９　１０：０７：１４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３０５　

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

Relieve any pressure in the coolingsystem by turning the radiator capcounterclockwise, withoutpressing down.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Engine Coolant

Maintenance

301

RADIATOR CAP

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０８／０７／１９　１０：０７：２３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３０６　

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

The low washerlevel indicator comes on when thelevel is low (see page ).

Check the fluid level by removingthe cap and looking at the levelgauge.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition them.

61

On Canadian models:

Windshield Washers

302

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

０８／０７／１９　１０：０７：２９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３０７　

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks within the HOT range.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the dipstickhole to bring it to the levelbetween the upper and lowermarks.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda CVT Fluid(Continuously VariableTransmission fluid).

Park the vehicle on level ground.Start the engine, let it run until theradiator fan comes on, then shutoff the engine. For accurateresults, wait about 60 seconds (butno longer than 90 seconds) beforedoing step 2.

3.

4.

5.2.

1.

CONTINUED

Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT)

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance

303

DIPSTICK UPPERMARK

LOWERMARK

HOTRange

０８／０７／１９　１０：０７：３９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３０８　

Check the brake fluid level in thereservoirs monthly.

Replace the brake fluid every 3 years,independent of mileage.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid when thisservice is indicated by a maintenancemessage on the information display.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

Check the fluid level several secondsafter you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position. The fluid levelshould be between the MIN andMAX marks on the side of thereservoir. If the level is at or belowthe MIN mark, your brake systemneeds attention. Have the brakesystem inspected for leaks or wornbrake pads.

6.

Transmission Fluid, Brake Fluid

Brake Fluid

304

MAX

MIN

０８／０７／１９　１０：０７：４８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３０９　

CONTINUED

To change a bulb on the left side,remove the coolant tube from thetwo clips.

Open the hood. Remove the reserve tank from itsholder by pulling it straight up.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk, readjustment may be required.Adjustments should be done by yourdealer or another qualifiedtechnician.

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its base, and protect the glassfrom contact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

1.

Headlight Aiming

Replacing a Headlight Bulb

Lights

High Beam Headlight

Maintenance

305

COOLANT TUBE

CLIP

CLIP HOLDER

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

０８／０７／１９　１０：０７：５８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３１０　

If you replaced a headlight bulb onthe driver’s side, reinstall theengine coolant reserve tank.

To change the bulb on the driver’sside, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theright, then turn off the engine. Tochange the bulb on the passenger’sside, turn the steering wheel to theleft.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender, and pull the innerfender cover back.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Install the new bulb, and turn itone-quarter turn clockwise to lockit in place.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the bulb from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

2.

3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

1.

Low Beam Headlight

Lights

306

TAB CONNECTOR

BULB

HOLDING CLIP

０８／０７／１９　１０：０８：０７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３１１　

To change the bulb on the driver’sside, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theright, then turn off the engine. Tochange the bulb on the passenger’sside, turn the steering wheel to theleft.


Install the new bulb, and turn itone-quarter turn clockwise to lockit in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Reinstall the inner fender cover.Then reinstall the holding clips,and lock them in place by pushingon their centers.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

5.

6.

1.

7.

8.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Lights

Replacing the Front Side Marker/Turn Signal Light Bulb

Maintenance

307

TAB

BULBHOLDING CLIP

０８／０７／１９　１０：０８：１７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３１２　

Open the trunk.Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender, and pull the innerfender cover back.

Remove the bulb from the socketby pushing the bulb in and turningit counterclockwise until it unlocks.

Install the new bulb in the socket.Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Reinstall the inner fender cover.Then reinstall the holding clips,and lock them in place by pushingon their centers.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.


Use the flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the screws in the center ofeach fastener on the side of theboot lining. Remove the fastenersfirst, then pull the lining backcarefully.Determine which of the four bulbsis burned out: stop/tail-light, back-up light, side marker light, or turnsignal light.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

3.

2.

2.

Replacing Rear Bulbs(In Fenders)

Lights

308

FASTENER

BULB

SOCKETFASTENER

０８／０７／１９　１０：０８：２７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３１３　

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Put the fasteners into the holes onthe side of the trunk lining.Reinstall the screws.

Reinstall the trunk lining. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the trunk seal.


Open the trunk.

Use the Phillips-head screwdriver toremove the screws in the center ofeach fastener on the back of the bootlid. Remove the fasteners first, thenpull the lining back carefully.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

3.

CONTINUED

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Trunk Lid)

Lights

Maintenance

309

BULBS

SOCKETS

SOCKETS

BULB

BULB FASTENER

０８／０７／１９　１０：０８：３８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３１４　

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket back into thelight assembly. Turn it clockwiseto lock it in place.

Push the trunk lid trim back intoposition.

Put the fasteners into the holes onthe trunk lid trim. Reinstall thescrews.

Before using an automatic car wash,remove the radio antenna so it doesnot get damaged. Remove theantenna by unscrewing it. When youreinstall the antenna, tighten itsecurely.

Before entering or parking in areaswith low ceiling height, remove theantenna.


Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Roof Antenna

Lights, Roof Antenna

310

BULB

SOCKET

０８／０７／１９　１０：０８：４７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３１５　

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air dry beforeyou use the vehicle.Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

If you use non-Honda floor mats,make sure they fit properly and thatthey can be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mats.

The driver’s floor mat that camewith your vehicle hooks over thefloor mat anchors. This keeps thefloor mat from sliding forward andpossibly interfering with the pedalsor making the front passenger’sweight sensors ineffective.

If you remove the driver’s floor mat,make sure to re-anchor it when youput it back in your vehicle.

Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats

Floor MatsCleaning the Seat Belts

Maintenance

311

LOOP

０８／０７／１９　１０：０８：５４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３１６　

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the heating andcooling system/climate controlsystem.

Have your dealer replace the filterwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air, or if the flow fromthe heating and cooling systembecomes less than usual.

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every 6 months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, and areasthat are getting hard or if they leavestreaks and unwiped areas whenused.

To replace a wiper blade:

Raise each wiper arm off thewindshield, lifting the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

1.

Dust and Pollen Filter, Wiper Blades

Dust and Pollen Filter Wiper Blades

312

WIPER ARMS

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and wiper arms.

０８／０７／１９　１０：０９：０２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３１７　

CONTINUED

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm:

Put a cloth on the edge of thelock tab, then push up on thelock tab carefully with a flat-tipscrewdriver.

When replacing a wiper blade,make sure not to drop the wiperblade or wiper arm down on thewindshield.

Remove the blade from its holderby grabbing the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Pivot the blade assembly towardthe wiper arm until it releasesfrom the wiper arm.

2. 3.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance

313

WIPER ARM

LOCK TAB

BLADE

０８／０７／１９　１０：０９：１０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３１８　

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Make sure the three rubber tabsinside the blade fit to each notch ofthe reinforcement, as shown.

Place the top of the wiper blade onthe end of the blade assembly, andslide the blade onto the assemblyin the direction pointed to by thearrow.Make sure the tab on the bladeassembly fits in the indent of thewiper blade and the blade iscompletely installed.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Make sure the blade is completelyinstalled and that its edge is notbunched up.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield, the passenger’sside first, then the driver’s side.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Wiper Blades

314

TOP

REINFORCEMENT

BLADE

TAB

INDENT

０８／０７／１９　１０：０９：１９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３１９　

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Clean the wheels as you would therest of the exterior. Wash them withthe same solution, and rinse themthoroughly.

Aluminum alloy wheels have aprotective clear-coat that keeps thealuminum from corroding andtarnishing. Cleaning the wheels withharsh chemicals (including somecommercial wheel cleaners) or a stiffbrush can damage the clear-coat. Toclean the wheels, use a milddetergent and a soft brush or sponge.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) warns you when a tirepressure is low. See page formore information.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

282

On U.S. models

On Canadian models

CONTINUED

Inflation GuidelinesTiresWheels

Wheels, Tires

Maintenance

315

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

０８／０７／１９　１０：０９：３０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３２０　

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot [driven for several miles(kilometers)], you will see readings 4to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

See page or refer to the tireplacard on the driver’s doorjamb forcorrect tire pressure.

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at least 3hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

Even though your vehicle isequipped with TPMS, werecommend that you visually checkyour tires every day. If you think atire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

351

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure

On U.S. models

Tires

Recommended Tire Pressures

316

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

P195/65R15 89S32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2kgf/cm )

Front/Rear:

０８／０７／１９　１０：０９：４１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３２１　

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see a 1/2inch (12.7 mm) wide band across thetread. This shows there is less than1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left onthe tire.

The service life of your tires isdependent on many factors,including, but not limited to, drivinghabits, road conditions, vehicleloading, inflation pressure,maintenance history, speed, andenvironmental conditions (evenwhen the tires are not in use).

The last four digits of the TIN (tireidentification number) are found onthe sidewall of the tire and indicatethe date of manufacture (See

on page ).

In addition to your regularinspections and inflation pressuremaintenance, it is recommended thatyou have annual inspectionsperformed once the tires reach fiveyears old. It is also recommendedthat all tires, including the spare, beremoved from service after 10 yearsfrom the date of manufacture,regardless of their condition or stateof wear.

353

Tire Inspection Tire Service Life

TireLabeling

Tires

Maintenance

317

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

０８／０７／１９　１０：０９：５０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３２２　

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe information display. Move thetires to the positions shown in thechart each time they are rotated. Ifyou purchase directional tires, rotateonly front-to-back.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS and vehicle stability assistsystem (VSA) to work inconsistently.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

Tires

Replacing Tires and WheelsTire RotationTire Maintenance

318

Front Front

(Front Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(Front DirectionalTires and Wheels)

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.

０８／０７／１９　１０：０９：５８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３２３　

＋Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page

for tire size information.

Tires:

Wheels:

The ABS and VSA system work bycomparing the speed of the wheels.When replacing tires, use the samesize originally supplied with thevehicle. Tire size and constructioncan affect wheel speed and maycause the ABS or VSA system toactivate.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels (if equipped). If youdo not, the tire pressure monitoringsystem will not work.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

352

354

CONTINUED

Tires

Winter Driving

Wheel and Tire SpecificationsSnow Tires

Maintenance

319

P195/65R15 89S

15 x 6 J

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

０８／０７／１９　１０：１０：１０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３２４　

Mount tire chains on your tires whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Honda stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow, made by Security ChainCompany (SCC).

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Cable-type: SCC RADIAL CHAINSC1030

Tire Chains

Tires

320

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

０８／０７／１９　１０：１０：１５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３２５　

－

Check the condition of the 12 voltbattery monthly by looking at thetest indicator window. The label onthe battery explains the testindicator’s colors.

If your vehicle’s 12 volt battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the IMAbattery level gauge reading will notbe correct the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It will show less than theactual level temporarily. It will showthe correct level after you drive forat least 30 minutes.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfurther corrosion.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the 12 Volt Battery

Maintenance

321

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

０８／０７／１９　１０：１０：２２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３２６　

Fill the fuel tank.

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Park.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the 12 volt battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, such

as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

Reconnect the 12 volt battery anddrive your vehicle every month forabout 30 minutes. This will keepthe IMA battery charged and ingood condition.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle on and offtwice). Preferably, do this once amonth.

Vehicle Storage

322

If this vehicle is unused f or over onemonth, the service lif e of the 158VNickel-Metal Hydride battery will bereduced and the battery may bepermanently damaged.

０８／０７／１９　１０：１０：３２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３２７　

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 324....................Changing a Flat Tire . 325

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 329................................Jump Starting . 331

..............If the Engine Overheats . 333.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 335..........Charging System Indicator . 336

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 337...............Brake System Indicator . 338

..............................................Fuses . 339..............................Fuse Locations . 343

......................Emergency Towing . 345

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

323

０８／０７／１９　１０：１０：３６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３２８　

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater cautionwhile driving.

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tire.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

On vehicles with the TPMSsystem, the low tire pressureindicator comes on and stays onafter you replace the flat tire withthe compact spare tire. Afterseveral miles (kilometers) drivingwith the compact spare tire, theTPMS indicator comes on and thelow tire pressure indicator goes off.

Compact Spare Tire

324

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

０８／０７／１９　１０：１０：４４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３２９　

CONTINUED

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area to stopthat is far away from the traffic lanes.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park. Apply theparking brake.

Open the trunk. Raise the trunkfloor by lifting up on the back edge.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Take the tool case out of the sparetire.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

325

JACK

SPARE TIRETRUNK FLOOR

TOOL CASE

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

０８／０７／１９　１０：１０：５３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３３０　

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

Remove the center cap from thewheel with the extension.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

6. 7. 8.


326

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

JACKING POINTS

０８／０７／１９　１０：１０：５９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３３１　

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Handle thewheel nuts carefully; they may behot from driving. Place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

CONTINUED


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

327

BRAKE HUB

WHEEL NUT WRENCH EXTENSION

０８／０７／１９　１０：１１：０７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３３２　

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Store the jack in the tool case.

Store the center cap in the trunk.Make sure it does not getscratched or damaged.

Lower the trunk floor, then closethe trunk lid.

14. 15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.


328

SPACER CONEWING BOLT

Forsparetire

Fornormaltire

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

０８／０７／１９　１０：１１：１７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３３３　

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe 12 volt battery and terminalconnections (see page ). Youcan then try jump starting thevehicle from a booster battery(see page ).

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound, a series of clicks, ornothing at all.Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.The transmission must be in Parkor neutral or the starter will notoperate.

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .331

345

321

331

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Emergency Towing

Jump Starting

If the Engine Won’t Start

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

329

０８／０７／１９　１０：１１：２５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３３４　

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

59

271

339

345

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

EmergencyTowing

If the Engine Won’t Start

330

０８／０７／１９　１０：１１：３１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３３５　

＋

＋

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

To jump start your vehicle:

The numbers in the illustration showyou the order to connect the jumpercables.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

You cannot start your vehicle bypushing or pulling it.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the 12 voltbattery.

Turn off all electrical accessories:heater, A/C, climate control, audiosystem, lights, etc. Put thetransmission in Park, and set theparking brake.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Jump Starting

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

331

BOOSTER BATTERY

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

０８／０７／１９　１０：１１：４１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３３６　

－

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.

If your vehicle’s 12 volt battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the IMAbattery level gauge reading will notbe correct the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It will show less than theactual level temporarily. It will showthe correct level after you drive forat least 30 minutes.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

7.

6.

4.

5.

Jump Starting

332

０８／０７／１９　１０：１１：４７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３３７　

The reading on the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).

When the current fuel mileage isshown on the display, thetemperature gauge will interrupt onthe display and blink for severaltimes if the coolant temperaturerises to 224°F (118°C) or more. Atthe same time, the beeper soundsonce.

If your vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge reading comes down to themidpoint, then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Park, andset the parking brake. Turn off allaccessories, and turn on thehazard warning lights.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

If the Engine Overheats

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

333

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugereading at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

０８／０７／１９　１０：１１：５６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３３８　

Start the engine, and set theinterior temperature to maximum.Add coolant to the radiator up tothe base of the filler neck. If youdo not have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page

). Add coolant if the level isbelow the MIN mark.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the readingreaches the middle of thetemperature gauge or lowerbefore checking the radiator.

8.

9.

7.

6.

10.

11.

5.

345

258

345

If the Engine Overheats

EmergencyTowing

EmergencyTowing

334

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０８／０７／１９　１０：１２：０４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３３９　

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

The engine running generates the oilpressure. When the Auto Idle Stop isactivated, the engine is stopped, theoil pressure is dropped, and the lowoil pressure indicator does not comeon.

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning lights.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

This indicator should nevercome on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

1.

2.

3.

4.

257

297

345

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Emergency Towing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

335

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

０８／０７／１９　１０：１２：１２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３４０　

－－

If the Auto Idle Stop is active for anextended period, the chargingsystem indicator may come on. If ithappens, start the engine.

The charging system indicator mayalso come on if the Integrated MotorAssist (IMA) battery charge dropsbelow a desired level and the enginestarts to recharge the battery.

This indicator may blink after youstart the vehicle in the morningwhen the temperature is below 20°F ( 30°C). It will stop blinkingwhen the IMA battery warms up.

If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, the 12volt battery is not being charged.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

Charging System Indicator

336

０８／０７／１９　１０：１２：１７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３４１　

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may turn off as youcontinue driving, have your vehiclechecked by your dealer as soon aspossible.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If the indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. You will also see a‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message onthe information display. Tighten thecap until it clicks at least once.Tightening the cap will not turn theindicator off immediately; it can takeseveral days of normal driving.

If your vehicle’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It can take severaldays of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for an emissionstest until the readiness codes are set.Refer to formore information (see page ).360

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Readiness Code Emissions Testing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

337

If you keep driving with theMalf unction Indicator Lamp on, youcan damage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties. This indicator may alsocome on with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.

０８／０７／１９　１０：１２：２４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３４２　

If the ABS indicator comes on withthe brake system indicator, haveyour vehicle inspected by yourdealer immediately.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

The brake systemindicator normallycomes on when

you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position and as a reminder tocheck the parking brake. It will stayon if you do not fully release theparking brake.

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

If the brake system indicator(amber) comes on with the parkingbrake system indicator (red) withthe parking brake released, theremay be a malfunction with thepower-assist feature. When thepower-assist feature malfunctions,the brake indicator (red) comes onand a buzzer sounds for a second.The power-assist feature may stopwhen the brake effect is weak. Stopyour vehicle immediately at a safeplace and contact a dealer.

304

345Emergency

Towing

Brake System Indicator

338

U.S. Canada

０８／０７／１９　１０：１２：３２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３４３　

The vehicle’s fuses are contained inthree fuse boxes.

The primary and secondary under-hood fuse boxes are in the enginecompartment on the driver’s side.

The interior fuse box is underneaththe steering column.

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

339

TAB

UNDER-HOOD (PRIMARY) UNDER-HOOD (SECONDARY)INTERIOR

FUSE LABEL

０８／０７／１９　１０：１２：３８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３４４　

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that device. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isthe cause. Replace any blown fuses,and check if the device works.

Check each of the large fuses inthe primary under-hood fuse boxby looking through the top at thewire inside. Remove the screwswith a Phillips-head screwdriver.

1.

2.

3.

343 344

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses

340

BLOWN

FUSE BLOWN

０８／０７／１９　１０：１２：４５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３４５　

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse boxes and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided in the primaryunder-hood fuse box.

Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower. The spare fusesare provided on the back of theunder-hood fuse cover.

4. 5.

CONTINUED

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

341

FUSE PULLER

BLOWN

０８／０７／１９　１０：１２：５２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３４６　

When the audio system is disabled,the clock setting in the audio systemwill be canceled. You will need toreset the clock according to theinstructions in the audio systemsection in this owner’s manual.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified technician.

6.

Fuses

342

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

０８／０７／１９　１０：１２：５６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３４７　

－－

No.No. Circuits Protected

No. Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected

Amps.

Amps.Amps.

123

1

2

3

IMA2IMA1Booster MS

4

567891011121314151617181920212223

Headlight MainPower Window MainBooster MotorSub Fan MotorMain Fan MotorRear DefoggerBlowerHazardFI SubStop and HornIG Coil (EX)IG Coil (IN)Oil LevelNot UsedNot UsedIG CoilFI MainMG ClutchDBWInterior LightBack Up

Main FuseEPSOption MainIgnition Switch MainABS MotorABS F/S

50 A40 A40 A20 A20 A30 A40 A10 A15 A15 A15 A15 A7.5 A

20 A15 A7.5 A15 A7.5 A10 A

10 A7.5 A15 A

100 A70 A60 A50 A30 A40 A

Fuse Locations

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

343

UNDER-HOOD PRIMARY FUSE BOX UNDER-HOOD SECONDARY FUSE BOX

０８／０７／１９　１０：１３：０５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３４８　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－＊

＊

＊

No. No.

No.

Circuits ProtectedAmps.

Amps.

Amps. Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected

12345678

910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132333435363738

ODSMETERSRSRight Headlight High BeamLeft Headlight High BeamSmall (Interior)Small (Exterior)Right Headlight Low Beam

7.5 A7.5 A10 A10 A10 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A

10 A20 A15 A

20 A(7.5 A)(7.5 A)

20 A20 A

(15 A)15 A20 A

20 A20 A

7.5 A10 A7.5 A30 A

7.5 A15 A10 A7.5 A15 A

7.5 A

Power WindowFuel PumpIG1 ACGABS/VSA UnitSeat HeaterNot UsedTPMSNot Used

Left Headlight Low BeamHeadlight High MainSmall (Main)Not UsedHeadlight Low Main(HAC)STSNot UsedDoor LockDriver’s Power WindowNot UsedRear ACC SocketACCPassenger’s Power WindowNot UsedRight Rear Power WindowLeft Rear Power WindowNot UsedACC, RadioHACDaytime Running LightWiper

: Optional in U.S.

Fuse Locations

344

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

０８／０７／１９　１０：１３：１３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３４９　

－

－

CONTINUED

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do this:

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the vehicle no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

There are two ways to tow yourvehicle:

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front) and lift themoff the ground. The other two tiresremain on the ground.

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

Start the engine.Press on the brake pedal. Movethe shift lever through all itspositions.Shift to D position for 5 seconds,then to N.Turn off the engine.Release the parking brake.Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.Wheel-lif t Equipment

Flat-bed Equipment

This is anacceptable way to tow yourvehicle.

This is the best way totransport your vehicle.

Emergency Towing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

345

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine, your vehicle must betransported with the f ront wheels of fthe ground.

０８／０７／１９　１０：１３：２３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３５０　

Emergency Towing

346

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle’s weight.

０８／０７／１９　１０：１３：２６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３５１　

－

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 348................................Specifications . 350

DOT Tire Quality Grading......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 352

Uniform Tire Quality..................................Grading . 352.................................Treadwear . 352

......................................Traction . 352.............................Temperature . 353

.................................Tire Labeling . 353Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) Required Federal............................Explanation . 355

.......................Emissions Controls . 357.....................The Clean Air Act . 357

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 357

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 357

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 357

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 358....................PGM-FI System . 358

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 358

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 358

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 358

....................Replacement Parts . 358..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 359

........................Emissions Testing . 360

Technical Information

TechnicalInform

ation

347

０８／０７／１９　１０：１３：３０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３５２　

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

The VIN is also located on theengine bulkhead. Slide the cover onthe engine compartment bulkhead toview the VIN. Always close the coverwhen finished.

Identif ication Numbers

348

COVER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (VIN)

０８／０７／１９　１０：１３：３５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３５３　

The engine number is stamped intothe engine block.

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The IMA Motor Number is stampedon the motor housing.

Identif ication Numbers

TechnicalInform

ation

349

ENGINE NUMBER

IMA MOTORNUMBER

TRANSMISSION NUMBER

０８／０７／１９　１０：１３：４０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３５４　

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications

350

Dimensions

Weights

Engine

Seating Capacities

Capacities

176.7 in (4,489 mm)69.0 in (1,752 mm)56.3 in (1,430 mm)106.3 in (2,700 mm)59.1 in (1,501 mm)60.2 in (1,529 mm)

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

3.0 US qt (2.8 )5.4 US qt (5.1 )

1.255 US gal (4.75 )1.59 US gal (6.0 )

3.4 US qt (3.2 )3.2 US qt (3.0 )4.0 US qt (3.8 )

12.3 US gal (46.6 )

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

SK20HPR-L11ILFR6J-11K

10.882 cu-in (1,339 cm )

2.87 x 3.15 in (73.0 x 80.0 mm)

Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC i-VTECgasoline engine with Hybrid Electric

TotalFrontRear

523

Fuel tank

EnginecoolantEngine oil

AutomatictransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity: 0.11 US gal (0.4 )

2.6 US qt (2.5 )4.8 US qt (4.5 )

FrontRear

Approx.

1 :

2 :

(NGK)(DENSO)

ChangeTotalChange

Including filterWithout filter

TotalChangeTotal

U.S. VehiclesCanada Vehicles

1

2

０８／０７／１９　１０：１３：５６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３５５　

－－

－－

－－－

－－－－－－－－－

－－

Specifications

TechnicalInform

ation

351

Air Conditioning Fuses

Alignment

12 Volt Battery

Tires

Lights

HFC-134a (R-134a)14.1 15.9 oz (400 450 g)

SE-10Y

12 V 60 W

12 V 3 CP

12 V 21/5 W12 V 21 W

7°6’1°39’0°3’

0.00 in (0.0 mm)

P195/65R15 89S

2.0 in (2.0 mm)

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant oil type

Interior

Under-hood

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

12 V12 V 51 W

12 V 21 W

12 V12 V12 V12 V

5 W8 W8 W5 W

Capacity 12 V 35 AH/20 HR

T135/80D15 99M32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Size

Pressure

12 V 2 CP

12 V 28 AH/5 HR

24/2.2 CP

Headlights

Front turn signal/side markerlightsRear turn signal lightsBrake/Taillights (in fenders)Back-up lightsRear side marker lightsTaillights (in trunk lid)License plate lightsCeiling lightSpotlightsTrunk light

See page 339 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door under the steeringcolumn.See page 339 or the fuse boxcover.

FrontRearFrontRearFront

HighLow

(HB3)(HB4)

Front/RearSpareFront/RearSpare

０８／０７／１９　１０：１４：１７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３５６　

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample:

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

352

０８／０７／１９　１０：１４：２６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３５７　

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

CONTINUED

Temperature Tire Labeling

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles), Tire Labeling

TechnicalInform

ation

353

(4) (3) (2)

(1)

(1)

(1)(2)(3)(4)

TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE

Tire Size

Maximum Tire PressureMaximum Tire Load

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

０８／０７／１９　１０：１４：３４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３５８　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Tire type code.

Date of manufacture.Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. The following is anexample of tire size with anexplanation of what each componentmeans.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Rim diameter in inches.

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following example.TIN is located on the sidewall of thetire.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

Max Press The maximum airpressure the tire canhold.

Max Load The maximum load thetire can carry atmaximum air pressure.

YearWeek

P

R

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202

S

195

65

15

89

Tire Labeling

Tire Size

Tire Identif ication Number (TIN)

Maximum Tire Load

Maximum Tire Pressure

354

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

P195/65R15 89S

０８／０７／１９　１０：１４：５０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３５９　

－

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale

when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure.

(If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicatedon the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label.

CONTINUED

U.S. models only

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

TechnicalInform

ation

355

０８／０７／１９　１０：１４：５６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３６０　

－

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is provided bya separate telltale, which displays thesymbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated,

the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure asintended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

356

０８／０７／１９　１０：１５：０２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３６１　

＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positivecrankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to the

intake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Emissions Controls

TechnicalInform

ation

357

０８／０７／１９　１０：１５：１０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３６２　

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation, and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcome out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.The PGM-FI system uses sequential

multiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: air intake,engine control, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM)uses various sensors to determinehow much air is going into theengine. It then controls how muchfuel to inject under all operatingconditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Emissions Controls

358

０８／０７／１９　１０：１５：１９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３６３　

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine well maintained.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

TechnicalInform

ation

359

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS

U.S. model is shown

０８／０７／１９　１０：１５：２６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３６４　

If you take your vehicle for anemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park. Increasethe engine speed to 2,000 rpm, andhold it there until the temperaturegauge rises to at least 1/4 of thescale (about 3 minutes).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, let the engine idle for 20seconds.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F (4° and 35°C).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Testing of Readiness Codes

Emissions Testing

360

０８／０７／１９　１０：１５：３４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３６５　

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD. Do not use the cruise control.When traffic allows, drive for 90seconds without moving theaccelerator pedal. (Vehicle speedmay vary slightly; this is okay.) Ifyou cannot do this for acontinuous 90 seconds because oftraffic conditions, drive for at least30 seconds, then repeat it twomore times (for a total of 90seconds).

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 30minutes.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

7. 8.

9.

Emissions Testing

TechnicalInform

ation

361

０８／０７／１９　１０：１５：３９　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３６６　

362

０８／０７／１９　１０：１５：４１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３６７　

....Customer Service Information . 364....................Warranty Coverages . 365

Reporting Safety Defects..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 366

.....................Authorized Manuals . 367

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

363

０８／０７／１９　１０：１５：４４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３６８　

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact HondaCustomer Service.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )

Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicle

Date of purchase

Mileage on your vehicle

Your name, address, and tele-phone number

A detailed description of theproblem

Name of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

348

Customer Service Information

364

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Honda Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

Customer Relations

０８／０７／１９　１０：１５：５１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３６９　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

this warranty gives upto 100% credit toward a replacementbattery.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered by a limited warranty.Please read your warranty bookletfor details.

covers all Hondareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2009 Honda warranty informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2009 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

365

０８／０７／１９　１０：１６：０１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３７０　

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 NewJersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC20590.You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from .

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

366

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

０８／０７／１９　１０：１６：０５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３７１　

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order by phone or online:

Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

Covers maintenance and recommended procedures forrepair to engine and chassis components. It is writtenfor the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enoughfor most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depthtroubleshooting information for each electrical circuitin your vehicle.

Describes the procedures involved in the replacementof damaged body parts.

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

(U.S. only)

Authorized Manuals

Authorized

Manuals

367

Form Description

2006-2009 Honda Civic Hybrid Service Manual

2006-2009 Honda Civic Hybrid

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2006-2009 Model Series Honda Civic 2/4 Door

Body Repair Manual

2009 Honda Civic Hybrid Owner’s Manual

2009 Honda Civic Hybrid

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

2009 Honda Civic Hybrid Honda Service History

2009 Honda Civic Hybrid Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Publication

Form Number

61SNC03

61SNC03EL

61SNA30

31SNC630

31SNC820

31SNCM30

31SNCQ30

HON-R

www. helminc. com

０８／０７／１９　１０：１６：１４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３７２　

368

０８／０７／１９　１０：１６：１６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３７３　

CONTINUED

....................................Accessories . 263ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 80.............Accessory Power Socket . 101

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 297...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 21

...Airbags, Additional Information . 21

...Additional Safety Precautions . 32..........Advanced Airbag System . 26

.............................Airbag Service . 32How the Passenger Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 31How the Side Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 30..How the SRS Indicator Works . 30

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 24

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 29........................SRS Components . 21

..............Air Conditioning System . 104.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 315

......................................Antifreeze . 300

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)...............................Indicator . 59, 280

...................................Operation . 280..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 209

Anti-theft Steering Column..........................................Lock . 80........................................Armrest . 95

................................Audio System . 110.....Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 83

.........................Auto Door Locking . 82.....................Auto Door Unlocking . 85

........................Auto Idle Stop . 276, 277...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 19

.............Automatic Speed Control . 214.Automatic Transmission (CVT) . 272

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 350...............Checking Fluid Level . 303

.......................................Shifting . 273Shift Lever Position

...............................Indicators . 272................Shift Lever Positions . 273

....................Shift Lock Release . 275

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 62, 336............................Jump Starting . 331

..............................Maintenance . 321............................Specifications . 350

..............................Before Driving . 253....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 18

...........................Beverage Holder . 100Brakes

...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 280.............Break-in, New Linings . 254

....................Bulb Replacement . 308...........................................Fluid . 304

...................Pad Wear Indicator . 280.........................................Parking . 99

...........System Indicator . 58, 63, 338.............................Braking System . 279

.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 254..Brightness Control, Instruments . 75

Index

A B

IND

EX

I

０８／０７／１９　１０：１６：２０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３７４　

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 309

.....................Brake Lights . 308, 309........Front Side Marker Lights . 307

...........Front Turn Signal Light . 307.................................Headlights . 305

..........................Parking Lights . 307.........Rear Side Marker Lights . 308..........Rear Turn Signal Lights . 308

............................Specifications . 351..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 305

.........................................Card, PC . 170............................Capacities Chart . 350

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 52.............................Carrying Cargo . 264

.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii..................................Ceiling Light . 102

........................Certification Label . 348............................................Chains . 320

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 325Changing Oil

........................................How to . 298......................................When to . 289

...Charging System Indicator . 62, 336..............Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 69............Checklist, Before Driving . 270

.....................................Child Safety . 34Child Seats

.............LATCH Anchor System . 43.............................Lower Anchor . 43............................Tether Anchor . 47

..................Childproof Door Locks . 82....................Cleaning the Wheels . 315

.........................Clock, Setting the . 212........................CO in the Exhaust . 357

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 271..............................Compact Spare . 324

.............Controls, Instruments and . 55Coolant

........................................Adding . 300....................................Checking . 258

.........................Proper Solution . 300...................Temperature Gauge . 66

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 357

............Cruise Control Operation . 214....Customer Service Information . 364

...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii...................................Dashboard . 3, 56

................Daytime Running Lights . 75............Defects, Reporting Safety . 366

........................Defog and Defrost . 108................Defogger, Rear Window . 76..............Defrosting the Windows . 108

....................................Dimensions . 350...............Dimming the Headlights . 74

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 303

..................................Engine Oil . 257..........................Directional Signals . 74

Disc Brake Pad Wear...................................Indicators . 280

............................Disc Player . 122, 160..................Display Change Button . 66

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 300Doors

.Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 82.....................Auto Door Locking . 82

.................Auto Door Unlocking . 85..............Locking and Unlocking . 81

......................Power Door Locks . 81

Index

C

D

II

０８／０７／１９　１０：１６：２５　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３７５　

＊

CONTINUED

........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 352...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...........................................Driving . 269....................................Economy . 259

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 312

..............................Economy, Fuel . 259............Emergencies on the Road . 323.............Battery, Jump Starting . 331...........Brake System Indicator . 338

................Changing a Flat Tire . 325.....Charging System Indicator . 337

..................Checking the Fuses . 340Low Oil Pressure

...........................Indicator . 62, 335Malfunction Indicator

................................Lamp . 62, 337..................Overheated Engine . 333

...........................Emergency Brake . 99......................Emergency Flashers . 76

......................Emergency Towing . 345............Emergency Trunk Opener . 88

.......................Emissions Controls . 357........................Emissions Testing . 360

Engine....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 66

..............Engine Speed Limiter . 274Malfunction Indicator

................................Lamp . 62, 337........Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 335..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 297

...............................Overheating . 333............................Specifications . 350

.......................................Starting . 271.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 357

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 52Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 16

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 259..........................................Gasohol . 254

...................................Fan, Interior . 105.........................................Features . 103

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 255Filters

.........................Dust and Pollen . 312...............................................Oil . 298

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 76...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 325

Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 303

..........................................Brake . 304..................Windshield Washer . 302

FM Stereo Radio...................................Reception . 204

..........................Four-way Flashers . 76..............................Front Airbags . 9, 21

.................................................Fuel . 254......................Fill Door and Cap . 255

...........................................Gauge . 66................Octane Requirement . 254

...............................Oxygenated . 254........................Reserve Indicator . 61

........................Tank, Filling the . 255.....................Fuses, Checking the . 340

Index

F

E

G

IND

EX

III

０８／０７／１９　１０：１６：３０　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３７６　

.........................................Gasoline . 254...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 61

...........................................Gauge . 66................Octane Requirement . 254

........................Tank, Filling the . 255................Gas Station Procedures . 255

Gauges...Engine Coolant Temperature . 66

...............................................Fuel . 67............Gearshift Lever Positions . 272..........Automatic Transmission . 272

......................................Glove Box . 101

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 305..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 76

Headlights........................................Aiming . 305

............Daytime Running Lights . 75..................High Beam Indicator . 60

........................Reminder Beeper . 74........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 305

...................................Turning on . 74..............................Head Restraints . 92...............................Heated Mirrors . 99

...................................Heaters, Seat . 96.............High Altitude, Starting at . 271

.................High-Low Beam Switch . 74.......................Hood, Opening the . 256

..................................................Horn . 72

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 348Ignition

..............................................Keys . 78...........................................Switch . 80

............Timing Control System . 358.........Important Safety Precautions . 6

.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 58...............................Infant Restraint . 39

Infant Seats......LATCH Anchorage System . 43

...........................Lower Anchors . 43

...........................Tether Anchors . 47.....Inflation, Recommended Tire . 316

...................................Pressures . 316........................Information Display . 65

...................................Inside Mirror . 98.............................Inspection, Tire . 317

............................Instrument Panel . 57

................Instrument Panel Lights . 58........Instrument Panel Brightness . 75

...............................Interior Lights . 102........................................Introduction . i

.......................................iPod . 130, 183

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 326.......................................Jack, Tire . 325

................................Jump Starting . 331

..................................................Keys . 78

.......................Label, Certification . 348.................Lane Change, Signaling . 74

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 14, 18...........LATCH Anchorage System . 43

Index

I

H

J

K

L

IV

０８／０７／１９　１０：１６：３６　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３７７　

CONTINUED

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 305

.......................................Indicator . 60.........................................Parking . 74

..................................Turn Signal . 74....................................Load Limits . 265

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 80Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 80............................Fuel Fill Door . 256

.................................Power Door . 81...........................................Trunk . 88

........................Low Coolant Level . 258.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 61

................................Lower Anchors . 43...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 335

...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 350

..................................Maintenance . 287........................................Minder . 289

.........................Minder Indicator . 61Owner’s Maintenance

...................................Checks . 294..........................................Safety . 288

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 62, 337.........................Meters, Gauges . 57, 65

...................Methanol in Gasoline . 255..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 98

...........................MP3/WMA . 122, 161

...................Neutral Gear Position . 274..................New Vehicle Break-in . 254

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 348

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 254.........................................Odometer . 69

................................Odometer,Trip . 67Oil

........................Change, How to . 298......................Change, When to . 289......................Checking Engine . 256..............Pressure Indicator . 62, 335

.......Selecting Proper Viscosity . 297...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 80

Onboard Refueling Vapor....................................Recovery . 357

..............................Outside Mirrors . 98....Outside Temperature Indicator . 67

....................Overheating, Engine . 333....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 294

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 255

..............Panel Brightness Control . 75........................Park Gear Position . 274

...........................................Parking . 278.................................Parking Brake . 99

Parking Brake and Brake.................System Indicator . 58, 338

.................................Parking Lights . 74..Parking Over Things that Burn . 278

.............................PGM-FI System . 358..................Playing the Radio . 113, 148

........................Playing a Disc . 122, 160.........................Playing a PC Card . 170

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 16

Index

M

N

O

P

IND

EX

V

０８／０７／１９　１０：１６：４２　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３７８　

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11...Additional Safety Precautions . 17

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16........................Protecting Children . 34.......................Protecting Infants . 39

.......Protecting Larger Children . 48.........Protecting Small Children . 40

...................Radiator Overheating . 333.Radio/Disc/Sound System . 112, 147

...................Readiness Codes . 337, 360Rear Lights, Bulb

......................Replacement . 308, 309............................Rear View Mirror . 98

.................Rear Window Defogger . 76................Reclining the Seat-backs . 91

.......................Remote Transmitter . 89Replacement Information

..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 312................Engine Oil and Filter . 298

..........................................Fuses . 340................................Light Bulbs . 305

................Maintenance Minder . 389...........................................Tires . 315

.............................Wiper Blades . 312Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 20Reserve Tank, Engine

...............................Coolant . 258, 300...............................Restraint, Child . 34

..................Reverse Gear Position . 274................................Rotation, Tire . 318

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 18............Safety Defects, Reporting . 366

.................................Safety Features . 7...........................................Airbags . 9

.......................................Seat Belts . 8.............Safety Labels, Location of . 53

..............................Safety Messages . iii.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 18

...............Additional Information . 18Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 19................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14, 18

........................Maintenance . 20, 311Reminder Light and

................................Beeper . 18, 58

...................System Components . 18...............Use During Pregnancy . 16

Wearing a Lap/Shoulder.....................................Belt . 14, 18

....................................Seat Heaters . 96........................Seats, Adjusting the . 91

............................Security System . 213...............................Serial Number . 348

...........................Service Intervals . 295.............................Service Manual . 367

.........Service Station Procedures . 255..........................Setting the Clock . 212

...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 272........................Shift Lock Release . 275

................................Side Airbags . 9, 28..........................Off Indicator . 30, 59

......................Side Curtain Airbags . 29Side Marker Lights, Bulb

..............................Replacement . 307...............................Signaling Turns . 74

.....................................Snow Tires . 319Spare Tire

......................................Inflating . 324............................Specifications . 351

....................Specifications Charts . 350................................Speed Control . 214

Index

RS

VI

０８／０７／１９　１０：１６：４７　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３７９　

CONTINUED

Speed-Sensitive Volume.......Compensation (SVC) . 115, 158

.......................................Spotlights . 102..........SRS, Additional Information . 21

...Additional Safety Precautions . 32.............................Airbag Service . 32

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 31

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 30

..How the SRS Indicator Works . 30How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 24...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28

How Your Side Curtain..........................Airbags Work . 29........................SRS Components . 21

.............................SRS Indicator . 30, 59....START (Ignition Key Position) . 80

.......................Starting the Engine . 271In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 271................With a Dead Battery . 331

........Steam Coming from Engine . 333Steering Wheel

..................................Adjustment . 77

.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 80....................Storing Your Vehicle . 322

Supplemental Restraint..................................System . 9, 21......................................Servicing . 32

.........................SRS Indicator . 30, 59...................System Components . 21

.........................................SVC . 115, 158..................................Synthetic Oil . 298

Taillights, Changing..................................Bulbs . 308, 309

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 323Technical Descriptions

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 352.....Emissions Control Systems . 357

.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 254..........State Emissions Testing . 360

Three Way Catalytic...............................Converter . 359

.................................Tire Labeling . 354.......................Temperature Gauge . 66

..............Tether Anchorage Points . 46............................Theft Protection . 209

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 359..........................Time, Setting the . 212

....................................Tire Chains . 320.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 325

...........................Tire Information . 352...............................................Tires . 315

..............................Air Pressure . 316.........................Checking Wear . 317..........................Compact Spare . 324

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 352......................................Inflation . 315

..................................Inspection . 317..............................Maintenance . 318

...................................Replacing . 318......................................Rotating . 318

................................Service Life . 317...........................................Snow . 319

............................Specifications . 351................................Tire Chains . 320

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 325Towing

.....................................A Trailer . 281..................Emergency Towing . 345

...........................Traction Devices . 320

Index

IND

EX

T

VII

０８／０７／１９　１０：１６：５１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３８０　

TransmissionChecking Fluid Level,

..............................Automatic . 303..................Fluid Selection . 303, 304

..............Identification Number . 388.............Shifting the Automatic . 273

.....................................Treadwear . 352

.......................................Trip Meter . 67................................................Trunk . 88

........................................Opening . 88...................Open Monitor Light . 60

....................................Turn Signals . 74

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 323

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 362........................Unleaded Gasoline . 254......................USB Adapter Cable . 185

.USB Flash Memory Device . 142, 196.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 299

................................Vanity Mirror . 100

.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 265......................Vehicle Dimensions . 350

....Vehicle Identification Number . 349Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA )

....................................System . 285...VSA Activation Indicator . 64, 285

.........................VSA Off Switch . 286........VSA System Indicator . 64, 285

.............................Vehicle Storage . 322.....................................Ventilation . 106

.................................................VIN . 348..................................Viscosity, Oil . 297

............WARNING, Explanation of . iii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 53

....................Warranty Coverages . 365Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 302.......................................Indicator . 61.....................................Operation . 73

Wheels...............Adjusting the Steering . 77............Alignment and Balance . 318

.....................................Cleaning . 320

..........................Compact Spare . 324...............................Nut Wrench . 325

Windows..................Operating the Power . 97

...........................Rear, Defogger . 76Windshield

.......................................Cleaning . 73...................................Defroster . 108

.......................................Washers . 73Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 312.....................................Operation . 73

....................................Worn Tires . 317.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 345

Index

V

WU

VIII

０８／０７／２２　０９：２７：０８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３８１　

０８／０７／１９　１０：１６：５８　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３８２　

０８／０７／１９　１０：１７：０１　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３８３　

０８／０７／１９　１０：１７：０３　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３８４　

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Brake Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid(CVT):

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Front/Rear:

Spare Tire:

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 87 or higher.

API Premium grade 0W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

3.4 US qt (3.2 )

Use Honda CVT Fluid(Continuously VariableTransmission Fluid) only

3.0 US qt (2.8 )

12.3 US gal (46.6 )Fluid change capacity:

215

304

０８／０７／２１　２０：２１：２４　３１ＳＮＣ６３０　０３８５　

2009 civic hybrid

Documents